commit 7f681b384ffca19519cafedecf9315d8b1b47746
Author: Chris Curran <ccurran(a)redhat.com>
Date: Wed Jun 30 14:53:39 2010 +1000
silly extra para
en-US/Reference_virsh.xml | 2 +-
1 files changed, 1 insertions(+), 1 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml b/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml
index 98c059d..7c724e5 100644
--- a/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml
+++ b/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml
@@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ Memory size: 1046528 kb
<title>Editing a storage pool definition</title>
<para>The <command>virsh pool-edit</command> command takes the name or UUID for a storage pool and opens the XML definition file for a storage pool in the users default text editor.</para>
</formalpara>
-<para><para>The <command>virsh pool-edit</command> command is equivalent to running the following commands:</para>
+<para>The <command>virsh pool-edit</command> command is equivalent to running the following commands:</para>
<screen># virsh pool-dumpxml <parameter>pool</parameter> < <parameter>pool</parameter>.xml
# vim <parameter>pool</parameter>.xml
# virsh pool-define <parameter>pool</parameter>.xml
1
0
commit 84bc3ac38e6dde7e2fdad12394edda31b73a26f4
Author: Chris Curran <ccurran(a)redhat.com>
Date: Wed Jun 30 14:34:49 2010 +1000
updating virsh reference
en-US/Reference_virsh.xml | 722 ++++++++++++++++++++++++---------------------
1 files changed, 381 insertions(+), 341 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml b/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml
index e0e4af5..98c059d 100644
--- a/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml
+++ b/en-US/Reference_virsh.xml
@@ -330,99 +330,13 @@
</tgroup>
</table>
<para>
- The <command>virsh</command> commands for managing and creating storage pools:
+ The <command>virsh</command> commands for managing and creating storage pools and volumes.
+ </para>
+ <para>For more information on using storage pools with virsh, refer to <ulink url="http://libvirt.org/formatstorage.html">http://libvirt.org/formatstorage.html</ulink>
</para>
- <screen>
- TODO
-
- STORAGE POOL COMMANDS
- The following commands manipulate storage pools. Libvirt has the capability to manage various storage solutions, including files, raw
- partitions, and domain-specific formats, used to provide the storage volumes visible as devices within virtual machines. For more
- detailed information about this feature, see the documentation at http://libvirt.org/formatstorage.html . A lot of the commands for
- pools are similar to the ones used for domains.
-
- find-storage-pool-sources type optional srcSpec
- Returns XML describing all storage pools of a given type that could be found. If srcSpec is provided, it is a file that contains
- XML to further restrict the query for pools.
-
- find-storage-pool-sources type optional host port
- Returns XML describing all storage pools of a given type that could be found. If host and port are provided, they control where
- the query is performed.
-
- pool-autostart pool-or-uuid optional --disable
- Configure whether pool should automatically start at boot.
-
-
- pool-build pool-or-uuid
- Build a given pool.
-
- pool-create file
- Create and start a pool object from the XML file.
-
- pool-create-as name --print-xml type optional source-host source-path source-dev source-name [target]
- Create and start a pool object name from the raw parameters. If --print-xml is specified, then print the XML of the pool object
- without creating the pool. Otherwise, the pool has the specified type.
-
- pool-define file
- Create, but do not start, a pool object from the XML file.
-
- pool-define-as name --print-xml type optional source-host source-path source-dev source-name [target]
- Create, but do not start, a pool object name from the raw parameters. If --print-xml is specified, then print the XML of the pool
- object without defining the pool. Otherwise, the pool has the specified type.
-
-
-pool-destroy pool-or-uuid
- Destroy a given pool object. Libvirt will no longer manage the storage described by the pool object, but the raw data contained in
- the pool is not changed, and can be later recovered with pool-create.
-
- pool-delete pool-or-uuid
- Destroy the resources used by a given pool object. This operation is non-recoverable. The pool object will still exist after this
- command.
-
- pool-dumpxml pool-or-uuid
- Returns the XML information about the pool object.
-
- pool-edit pool-or-uuid
- Edit the XML configuration file for a storage pool.
-
- This is equivalent to:
-
- virsh pool-dumpxml pool > pool.xml
- edit pool.xml
- virsh pool-define pool.xml
-
- except that it does some error checking.
- The editor used can be supplied by the $VISUAL or $EDITOR environment variables, and defaults to "vi".
-
- pool-info pool-or-uuid
- Returns basic information about the pool object.
-
- pool-list optional --inactive --all
- List pool objects known to libvirt. By default, only pools in use by active domains are listed; --inactive lists just the inactive
- pools, and --all lists all pools.
-
- pool-name uuid
- Convert the uuid to a pool name.
-
- pool-refresh pool-or-uuid
- Refresh the list of volumes contained in pool.
-
- pool-start pool-or-uuid
- Start the storage pool, which is previously defined but inactive.
-
-
-</screen>
-
-<!--
-DONE
-pool-undefine pool-or-uuid
- Undefine the configuration for an inactive pool.
-
- pool-uuid pool
- Returns the UUID of the named pool.-->
- <table frame="all" id="tabl-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Storage_options">
- <title>Storage pool commands</title>
+ <table frame="all" id="tabl-Virtualization-Managing_gunagement_options">
+ <title>Storage Pool options</title>
<tgroup cols="2">
<colspec colname="column1"></colspec>
<colspec colname="column2"></colspec>
@@ -439,94 +353,196 @@ pool-undefine pool-or-uuid
<tbody>
<row>
<entry>
- <command>pool-undefine</command>
+ find-storage-pool-sources<!-- type optional srcSpec--></entry>
+ <entry>
+ Returns the XML definition for all storage pools of a given type that could be found.
</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>find-storage-pool-sources</command><!-- type optional host--> port</entry>
+ <entry> Returns data on all storage pools of a given type that could be found as XML. If the host and port are provided, this command can be run remotely.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- Deletes the configuration for an inactive pool.
+ <command>pool-autostart <!--pool-or-uuid optional -FIXME-disable--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>Sets the storage pool to start at boot time.</entry>
</row>
- <row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- <command>pool-uuid</command>
+ <command>pool-build<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>The <command>pool-build</command> command builds a defined pool. This command can format disks and create partitions. </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- Returns the UUID of the named pool.
+ <command>pool-create<!-- file--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-create</command> creates and starts a storage pool from the provided XML storage pool definition file.</entry>
</row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para>
- This table contains miscellaneous <command>virsh</command> commands:
- </para>
- <table frame="all" id="tabl-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Miscellaneous_options">
- <title>Miscellaneous options</title>
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <colspec colname="column1"></colspec>
- <colspec colname="column2"></colspec>
- <thead>
- <row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- Command
+ <command>pool-create-as name<!-- -FIXME-print-xml type optional source-host source-path source-dev source-name [target]--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry><!--FIXME -->Creates and starts a storage pool from the provided parameters. If the <parameter>--print-xml</parameter> parameter is specified, the command prints the XML definition for the storage pool without creating the storage pool. </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- Description
+ <command>pool-define<!-- file--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>Creates a storage bool from an XML definition file but does not start the new storage pool.</entry>
</row>
- </thead>
- <tbody>
- <row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- <command>version</command>
+ <command>pool-define-as name<!-- -FIXME-print-xml type optional source-host source-path source-dev source-name [target]--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>Creates but does not start, a storage pool from the provided parameters. If the <parameter>--print-xml</parameter> parameter is specified, the command prints the XML definition for the storage pool without creating the storage pool. </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- Displays the version of <command>virsh</command>
+ <command>pool-destroy<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>Permanently destroys a storage pool in <command>libvirt</command>. The raw data contained in the storage pool is not changed and can be recovered with the <command>pool-create</command> command.</entry>
</row>
- <row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- <command>nodeinfo</command>
+ <command>pool-delete<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>Destroys the storage resources used by a storage pool. This operation cannot be recovered. The storage pool still exists after this command but all data is deleted.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
<entry>
- Outputs information about the hypervisor
+ <command>pool-dumpxml<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
</entry>
+ <entry>Prints the XML definition for a storage pool.</entry>
</row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-edit<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>Opens the XML definition file for a storage pool in the users default text editor. </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-info<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>Returns information about a storage pool.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry><command>pool-list<!-- optional -FIXME-inactive -FIXME-all--></command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>Lists storage pools known to libvirt. By default, <command>pool-list</command> lists pools in use by active guests. The <parameter>--inactive</parameter> parameter lists inactive pools and the <parameter>--all</parameter> parameter lists all pools.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-undefine</command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Deletes the definition for an inactive storage pool.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-uuid</command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Returns the UUID of the named pool.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-name <!--uuid--></command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>Prints a storage pool's name when provided the UUID of a storage pool.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-refresh<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>Refreshs the list of volumes contained in a storage pool.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>pool-start<!-- pool-or-uuid--></command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>Starts a storage pool that is defined but inactive.</entry>
+ </row>
+
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+</table>
+<para>
+ This table contains miscellaneous <command>virsh</command> commands:
+ </para>
+<table frame="all" id="tabl-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Miscellaneous_options">
+ <title>Miscellaneous options</title>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <colspec colname="column1"></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="column2"></colspec>
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Command
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>version</command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Displays the version of <command>virsh</command>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <command>nodeinfo</command>
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Outputs information about the hypervisor
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+</table>
+
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Connecting_to_the_hypervisor">
- <title>Connecting to the hypervisor</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Connecting_to_the_hypervisor">
+ <title>Connecting to the hypervisor</title>
+ <para>
Connect to a hypervisor session with <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh connect <parameter>{hostname OR URL}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
Where <command><name></command> is the machine name of the hypervisor. To initiate a read-only connection, append the above command with <command>-readonly</command>.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Creating_a_virtual_machine_XML_dump_configuration_file">
- <title>Creating a virtual machine XML dump (configuration file)</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Creating_a_virtual_machine_XML_dump_configuration_file">
+ <title>Creating a virtual machine XML dump (configuration file)</title>
+ <para>
Output a guest's XML configuration file with <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh dumpxml <parameter>{guest-id, guestname or uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This command outputs the guest's XML configuration file to standard out (<command>stdout</command>). You can save the data by piping the output to a file. An example of piping the output to a file called <replaceable>guest.xml</replaceable>:
</para>
<screen># virsh dumpxml <replaceable>GuestID</replaceable> > <replaceable>guest.xml</replaceable>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This file <filename>guest.xml</filename> can recreate the guest (refer to <xref linkend="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Editing_a_guests_configuration_file" />. You can edit this XML configuration file to configure additional devices or to deploy additional guests. Refer to <xref linkend="sect-Virtualization-Creating_custom_libvirt_scripts-Using_XML_configuration_files_with_virsh" /> for more information on modifying files created with <command>virsh dumpxml</command>.
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
An example of <command>virsh dumpxml</command> output:
</para>
<!--TODO dump a KVM file-->
@@ -557,155 +573,155 @@ pool-undefine pool-or-uuid
</devices>
</domain>
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Creating_a_guest_from_a_configuration_file">
- <title>Creating a guest from a configuration file</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Creating_a_guest_from_a_configuration_file">
+ <title>Creating a guest from a configuration file</title>
+ <para>
Guests can be created from XML configuration files. You can copy existing XML from previously created guests or use the <command>dumpxml</command> option (refer to <xref linkend="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Creating_a_virtual_machine_XML_dump_configuration_file" />). To create a guest with <command>virsh</command> from an XML file:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh create <replaceable>configuration_file.xml</replaceable>
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Editing_a_guests_configuration_file">
- <title>Editing a guest's configuration file</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Editing_a_guests_configuration_file">
+ <title>Editing a guest's configuration file</title>
+ <para>
Instead of using the <command>dumpxml</command> option (refer to <xref linkend="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Creating_a_virtual_machine_XML_dump_configuration_file" />) guests can be edited either while they run or while they are offline. The <command>virsh edit</command> command provides this functionality. For example, to edit the guest named <parameter>softwaretesting</parameter>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh edit <parameter>softwaretesting</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This opens a text editor. The default text editor is the <command>$EDITOR</command> shell parameter (set to <command>vi</command> by default).
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Suspending_a_guest">
- <title>Suspending a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Suspending_a_guest">
+ <title>Suspending a guest</title>
+ <para>
Suspend a guest with <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh suspend <parameter>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
When a guest is in a suspended state, it consumes system RAM but not processor resources. Disk and network I/O does not occur while the guest is suspended. This operation is immediate and the guest can be restarted with the <command>resume</command> (<xref linkend="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Resuming_a_guest" />) option.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Resuming_a_guest">
- <title>Resuming a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Resuming_a_guest">
+ <title>Resuming a guest</title>
+ <para>
Restore a suspended guest with <command>virsh</command> using the <command>resume</command> option:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh resume <parameter>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This operation is immediate and the guest parameters are preserved for <command>suspend</command> and <command>resume</command> operations.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Save_a_guest">
- <title>Save a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Save_a_guest">
+ <title>Save a guest</title>
+ <para>
Save the current state of a guest to a file using the <command>virsh</command> command:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh save <parameter>{domain-name, domain-id or domain-uuid} filename</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This stops the guest you specify and saves the data to a file, which may take some time given the amount of memory in use by your guest. You can restore the state of the guest with the <command>restore</command> (<xref linkend="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Restore_a_guest" />) option. Save is similar to pause, instead of just pausing a guest the present state of the guest is saved.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Restore_a_guest">
- <title>Restore a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Restore_a_guest">
+ <title>Restore a guest</title>
+ <para>
Restore a guest previously saved with the <command>virsh save</command> command (<xref linkend="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Save_a_guest" />) using <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh restore <parameter>filename</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This restarts the saved guest, which may take some time. The guest's name and UUID are preserved but are allocated for a new id.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Shut_down_a_guest">
- <title>Shut down a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Shut_down_a_guest">
+ <title>Shut down a guest</title>
+ <para>
Shut down a guest using the <command>virsh</command> command:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh shutdown <parameter>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
You can control the behavior of the rebooting guest by modifying the <command>on_shutdown</command> parameter in the guest's configuration file.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Rebooting_a_guest">
- <title>Rebooting a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Rebooting_a_guest">
+ <title>Rebooting a guest</title>
+ <para>
Reboot a guest using <command>virsh</command> command:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen>#virsh reboot <parameter>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
You can control the behavior of the rebooting guest by modifying the <command>on_reboot</command> element in the guest's configuration file.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Forcing_a_guest_to_stop">
- <title>Forcing a guest to stop</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Forcing_a_guest_to_stop">
+ <title>Forcing a guest to stop</title>
+ <para>
Force a guest to stop with the <command>virsh</command> command:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh destroy <parameter>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This command does an immediate ungraceful shutdown and stops the specified guest. Using <command>virsh destroy</command> can corrupt guest file systems . Use the <command>destroy</command> option only when the guest is unresponsive.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Getting_the_domain_ID_of_a_guest">
- <title>Getting the domain ID of a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Getting_the_domain_ID_of_a_guest">
+ <title>Getting the domain ID of a guest</title>
+ <para>
To get the domain ID of a guest:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh domid <parameter>{domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Getting_the_domain_name_of_a_guest">
- <title>Getting the domain name of a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Getting_the_domain_name_of_a_guest">
+ <title>Getting the domain name of a guest</title>
+ <para>
To get the domain name of a guest:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh domname <parameter>{domain-id or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Getting_the_UUID_of_a_guest">
- <title>Getting the UUID of a guest</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Getting_the_UUID_of_a_guest">
+ <title>Getting the UUID of a guest</title>
+ <para>
To get the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) for a guest:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh domuuid <replaceable>{domain-id or domain-name}</replaceable>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
An example of <command>virsh domuuid</command> output:
</para>
<screen># virsh domuuid r5b2-mySQL01
4a4c59a7-ee3f-c781-96e4-288f2862f011
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_guest_Information_">
- <title>Displaying guest Information </title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_guest_Information_">
+ <title>Displaying guest Information </title>
+ <para>
Using <command>virsh</command> with the guest's domain ID, domain name or UUID you can display information on the specified guest:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh dominfo <parameter>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This is an example of <command>virsh dominfo</command> output:
</para>
@@ -720,16 +736,16 @@ cpu time: 11.0s
max memory: 512000 kb
used memory: 512000 kb
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_host_information">
- <title>Displaying host information</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_host_information">
+ <title>Displaying host information</title>
+ <para>
To display information about the host:
</para>
- </formalpara>
+</formalpara>
<screen># virsh nodeinfo
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
An example of <command>virsh nodeinfo</command> output:
</para>
@@ -743,28 +759,44 @@ Threads per core: 2
Numa cell(s) 1
Memory size: 1046528 kb
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This displays the node information and the machines that support the virtualization process.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_the_guests">
- <title>Displaying the guests</title>
- <para>
+
+<formalpara>
+ <title>Editing a storage pool definition</title>
+ <para>The <command>virsh pool-edit</command> command takes the name or UUID for a storage pool and opens the XML definition file for a storage pool in the users default text editor.</para>
+</formalpara>
+<para><para>The <command>virsh pool-edit</command> command is equivalent to running the following commands:</para>
+<screen># virsh pool-dumpxml <parameter>pool</parameter> < <parameter>pool</parameter>.xml
+# vim <parameter>pool</parameter>.xml
+# virsh pool-define <parameter>pool</parameter>.xml
+</screen>
+
+<note>
+<title>Note</title>
+<para>The default editor is defined by the <command>$VISUAL</command> or <command>$EDITOR</command> environment variables, and default is <command>vi</command>.</para>
+</note>
+
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_the_guests">
+<title>Displaying the guests</title>
+<para>
To display the guest list and their current states with <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh list
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
Other options available include:
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
the <command>--inactive</command> option to list inactive guests (that is, guests that have been defined but are not currently active), and
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
the <command>--all</command> option lists all guests. For example:
</para>
-
+
<screen># virsh list --all
Id Name State
----------------------------------
@@ -773,54 +805,54 @@ Memory size: 1046528 kb
2 Domain010 inactive
3 Domain9600 crashed
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
The output from <command>virsh list</command> is categorized as one of the six states (listed below).
</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
The <computeroutput>running</computeroutput> state refers to guests which are currently active on a CPU.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
Guests listed as <computeroutput>blocked</computeroutput> are blocked, and are not running or runnable. This is caused by a guest waiting on I/O (a traditional wait state) or guests in a sleep mode.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
The <computeroutput>paused</computeroutput> state lists domains that are paused. This occurs if an administrator uses the <guilabel>pause</guilabel> button in <command>virt-manager</command>, <command>xm pause</command> or <command>virsh suspend</command>. When a guest is paused it consumes memory and other resources but it is ineligible for scheduling and CPU resources from the hypervisor.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
The <computeroutput>shutdown</computeroutput> state is for guests in the process of shutting down. The guest is sent a shutdown signal and should be in the process of stopping its operations gracefully. This may not work with all guest operating systems; some operating systems do not respond to these signals.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
Domains in the <computeroutput>dying</computeroutput> state are in is in process of dying, which is a state where the domain has not completely shut-down or crashed.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <computeroutput>crashed</computeroutput> guests have failed while running and are no longer running. This state can only occur if the guest has been configured not to restart on crash. <!-- Refer to the domain configuration manual page (<command> man xmdomain.cfg</command>) for more information. -->
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_virtual_CPU_information">
- <title>Displaying virtual CPU information</title>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <computeroutput>crashed</computeroutput> guests have failed while running and are no longer running. This state can only occur if the guest has been configured not to restart on crash. <!-- Refer to the domain configuration manual page (<command> man xmdomain.cfg</command>) for more information. -->
+ </para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_virtual_CPU_information">
+<title>Displaying virtual CPU information</title>
+<para>
To display virtual CPU information from a guest with <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh vcpuinfo <replaceable>{domain-id, domain-name or domain-uuid}</replaceable>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
An example of <command>virsh vcpuinfo</command> output:
</para>
-
+
<screen># virsh vcpuinfo r5b2-mySQL01
VCPU: 0
CPU: 0
@@ -828,117 +860,117 @@ State: blocked
CPU time: 0.0s
CPU Affinity: yy
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Configuring_virtual_CPU_affinity">
- <title>Configuring virtual CPU affinity</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Configuring_virtual_CPU_affinity">
+<title>Configuring virtual CPU affinity</title>
+<para>
To configure the affinity of virtual CPUs with physical CPUs:
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh vcpupin <parameter>domain-id vcpu cpulist</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
The <command>domain-id</command> parameter is the guest's ID number or name.
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
The <command>vcpu</command> parameter denotes the number of virtualized CPUs allocated to the guest.The <command>vcpu</command> parameter must be provided.
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
The <command>cpulist</command> parameter is a list of physical CPU identifier numbers separated by commas. The <command>cpulist</command> parameter determines which physical CPUs the VCPUs can run on.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Configuring_virtual_CPU_count">
- <title>Configuring virtual CPU count</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Configuring_virtual_CPU_count">
+<title>Configuring virtual CPU count</title>
+<para>
To modify the number of CPUs assigned to a guest with <command>virsh</command>:
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh setvcpus <parameter>{domain-name, domain-id or domain-uuid} count</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
The new <parameter>count</parameter> value cannot exceed the count above the amount specified when the guest was created.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Configuring_memory_allocation">
- <title>Configuring memory allocation</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Configuring_memory_allocation">
+<title>Configuring memory allocation</title>
+<para>
To modify a guest's memory allocation with <command>virsh</command> :
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh setmem {domain-id or domain-name} count
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
You must specify the <emphasis>count</emphasis> in kilobytes. The new count value cannot exceed the amount you specified when you created the guest. Values lower than 64 MB are unlikely to work with most guest operating systems. A higher maximum memory value does not affect an active guests. If the new value is lower the available memory will shrink and the guest may crash.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_guest_block_device_information">
- <title>Displaying guest block device information</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_guest_block_device_information">
+<title>Displaying guest block device information</title>
+<para>
Use <command>virsh domblkstat</command> to display block device statistics for a running guest.
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh domblkstat <replaceable>GuestName block-device</replaceable>
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_guest_network_device_information">
- <title>Displaying guest network device information</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Displaying_guest_network_device_information">
+<title>Displaying guest network device information</title>
+<para>
Use <command>virsh domifstat</command> to display network interface statistics for a running guest.
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh domifstat <replaceable>GuestName interface-device </replaceable>
</screen>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Migrating_guests_with_virsh">
- <title>Migrating guests with virsh</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Migrating_guests_with_virsh">
+<title>Migrating guests with virsh</title>
+<para>
A guest can be migrated to another host with <command>virsh</command>. Migrate domain to another host. Add --live for live migration. The <command>migrate</command> command accepts parameters in the following format:
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh migrate --live <parameter>GuestName DestinationURL</parameter>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
The <parameter>--live</parameter> parameter is optional. Add the <parameter>--live</parameter> parameter for live migrations.
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
The <parameter>GuestName</parameter> parameter represents the name of the guest which you want to migrate.
</para>
- <para>
+<para>
The <parameter>DestinationURL</parameter> parameter is the URL or hostname of the destination system. The destination system requires:
</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- Fedora 9 or newer,
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.4 (ASYNC update 4) or newer,
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
the same hypervisor version, and
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
the <command>libvirt</command> service must be started.
</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- <para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>
Once the command is entered you will be prompted for the root password of the destination system.
</para>
- <formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Managing_virtual_networks">
- <title>Managing virtual networks</title>
- <para>
+<formalpara id="form-Virtualization-Managing_guests_with_virsh-Managing_virtual_networks">
+<title>Managing virtual networks</title>
+<para>
This section covers managing virtual networks with the <command>virsh</command> command. To list virtual networks:
</para>
- </formalpara>
-
+</formalpara>
+
<screen># virsh net-list
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This command generates output similar to:
</para>
-
+
<screen># virsh net-list
Name State Autostart
-----------------------------------------
@@ -946,16 +978,16 @@ default active yes
vnet1 active yes
vnet2 active yes
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
To view network information for a specific virtual network:
</para>
-
+
<screen># virsh net-dumpxml <replaceable>NetworkName</replaceable>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
This displays information about a specified virtual network in XML format:
</para>
-
+
<screen># virsh net-dumpxml vnet1
<network>
<name>vnet1</name>
@@ -969,56 +1001,64 @@ vnet2 active yes
</ip>
</network>
</screen>
- <para>
+<para>
Other <command>virsh</command> commands used in managing virtual networks are:
</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-autostart <replaceable>network-name</replaceable></command> — Autostart a network specified as <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>.
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-autostart <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>
+ </command> — Autostart a network specified as <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-create <replaceable>XMLfile</replaceable></command> — generates and starts a new network using an existing XML file.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-create <replaceable>XMLfile</replaceable>
+ </command> — generates and starts a new network using an existing XML file.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-define <replaceable>XMLfile</replaceable></command> — generates a new network device from an existing XML file without starting it.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-define <replaceable>XMLfile</replaceable>
+ </command> — generates a new network device from an existing XML file without starting it.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-destroy <replaceable>network-name</replaceable></command> — destroy a network specified as <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-destroy <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>
+ </command> — destroy a network specified as <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-name <replaceable>networkUUID</replaceable></command> — convert a specified <replaceable>networkUUID</replaceable> to a network name.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-name <replaceable>networkUUID</replaceable>
+ </command> — convert a specified <replaceable>networkUUID</replaceable> to a network name.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-uuid <replaceable>network-name</replaceable></command> — convert a specified <replaceable>network-name</replaceable> to a network UUID.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-uuid <replaceable>network-name</replaceable>
+ </command> — convert a specified <replaceable>network-name</replaceable> to a network UUID.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-start <replaceable>nameOfInactiveNetwork</replaceable></command> — starts an inactive network.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-start <replaceable>nameOfInactiveNetwork</replaceable>
+ </command> — starts an inactive network.
</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>
- <command>virsh net-undefine <replaceable>nameOfInactiveNetwork</replaceable></command> — removes the definition of an inactive network.
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+ <para>
+ <command>virsh net-undefine <replaceable>nameOfInactiveNetwork</replaceable>
+ </command> — removes the definition of an inactive network.
</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
<!--<formalpara id="virshpool1"><title></title><para></para></formalpara>
<formalpara id="virshpool2"><title></title><para></para></formalpara>
<formalpara id="virshpool3"><title></title><para></para></formalpara>
<formalpara id="virshpool4"><title></title><para></para></formalpara>
<formalpara id="virshpool5"><title></title><para></para></formalpara>-->
-
+
</chapter>
1
0
commit e7f26808fc71294739cc5deb4c43dc8edaca69e0
Author: Chris Curran <ccurran(a)redhat.com>
Date: Tue Jun 29 12:44:47 2010 +1000
Revert "checking in update"
This reverts commit 2559f11a88521001830d5584d60ebb04fc185709.
en-US/Storage_Concepts.xml | 8 ++++----
1 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/en-US/Storage_Concepts.xml b/en-US/Storage_Concepts.xml
index d8f61d1..0224d5e 100644
--- a/en-US/Storage_Concepts.xml
+++ b/en-US/Storage_Concepts.xml
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
<term>The name of the volume and the storage pool</term>
<listitem>
<para>
- A volume may be referred to by name, along with an identifier for the storage pool it belongs in. On the virsh command line, this takes the form <parameter>--pool</parameter>
+ A volume may be referred to by name, along with an identifier for the storage pool it belongs in. On the virsh command line, this takes the form <parameter>-TODO-pool</parameter>
<replaceable>storage_pool</replaceable>
<replaceable>volume_name</replaceable>.
</para>
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
<para>
For example, a volume named <replaceable>firstimage</replaceable> in the <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable> pool.
</para>
- <screen># virsh vol-info --pool <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable>
+ <screen>virsh # vol-info -TODO-pool <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable>
<replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
Name: <replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
Type: block
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Allocation: 20.00 GB
<screen># virsh vol-path Wlvnf7-a4a3-Tlje-lJDa-9eak-PZBv-LoZuUr
/dev/<replaceable>guest_images</replaceable>/<replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
-# virsh vol-path --pool <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable> <replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
+# virsh vol-path -TODO-pool <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable> <replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
/dev/<replaceable>guest_images</replaceable>/<replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
</screen>
</listitem>
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Allocation: 20.00 GB
<screen># virsh vol-key /dev/<replaceable>guest_images</replaceable>/<replaceable>firstimage</replaceable>
Wlvnf7-a4a3-Tlje-lJDa-9eak-PZBv-LoZuUr
-# virsh vol-key --pool <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable> <replaceable>firstimage</replaceable> Wlvnf7-a4a3-Tlje-lJDa-9eak-PZBv-LoZuUr
+# virsh vol-key -TODO-pool <replaceable>guest_images</replaceable> <replaceable>firstimage</replaceable> Wlvnf7-a4a3-Tlje-lJDa-9eak-PZBv-LoZuUr
</screen>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
1
0
Author: transif
Date: 2010-06-30 01:19:47 +0000 (Wed, 30 Jun 2010)
New Revision: 142
Modified:
community/f13/pt-PT/Hardware.po
Log:
l10n: Updates to Portuguese (pt) translation
Transmitted-via: Transifex (translate.fedoraproject.org)
Modified: community/f13/pt-PT/Hardware.po
===================================================================
--- community/f13/pt-PT/Hardware.po 2010-06-30 01:17:02 UTC (rev 141)
+++ community/f13/pt-PT/Hardware.po 2010-06-30 01:19:47 UTC (rev 142)
@@ -1,4 +1,3 @@
-#
# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
# Nuno Miranda <nunmiranda(a)gmail.com>, 2010.
msgid ""
@@ -8,10 +7,10 @@
"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-28 21:56+0100\n"
"Last-Translator: Nuno Miranda <nunmiranda(a)gmail.com>\n"
"Language-Team: trans-pt(a)lists.fedoraproject.org\n"
-"Language: pt\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Language: pt\n"
"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
"X-Generator: Virtaal 0.5.2\n"
@@ -20,14 +19,6 @@
msgid "Hardware And Communication"
msgstr "Hardware e comunicação"
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format, fuzzy
-msgid "This chapter gives an overview of some of the hardware available for wireless LANs, the role they play, and further details about their operation."
-msgstr ""
-"Este capítulo apresenta uma visão geral de alguns hardwares disponíveis para "
-"LANs sem fios, o papel que desempenham, além de detalhes adicionais sobre o "
-"seu funcionamento."
-
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Components of a Wireless LAN"
@@ -36,85 +27,47 @@
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "In order for successful communications to take place in a WLAN, certain hardware is needed. The hardware can be generally categorized as being a <emphasis>transmitter</emphasis>, <emphasis>antenna</emphasis>, a <emphasis>receiver</emphasis>, or a combination of these."
-msgstr ""
-"Para obter comunicações de sucesso ao posicionar uma WLAN, determinado "
-"hardware é necessário. O hardware pode ser categorizado genericamente como "
-"sendo <emphasis>Transmissor</emphasis>, <emphasis>antena</emphasis>, um "
-"<emphasis>receptor</emphasis>, ou uma combinação destes. "
+msgstr "Para obter comunicações de sucesso ao posicionar uma WLAN, determinado hardware é necessário. O hardware pode ser categorizado genericamente como sendo <emphasis>Transmissor</emphasis>, <emphasis>antena</emphasis>, um <emphasis>receptor</emphasis>, ou uma combinação destes. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "Transmitter - A transmitter, as an <emphasis>active</emphasis> device, initiates an electromagnetic signal, beginning the wireless communication process. Usually, a transmitter sends this signal to an antenna after the data has been received by the originating station (ie. computer)."
-msgstr ""
-"Transmissor - Um transmissor, como dispositivo <emphasis>activo</emphasis>, "
-"inicia um sinal electromagnético, iniciando desta forma o processo da "
-"comunicação sem fios. Normalmente, o transmissor emite o sinal para uma "
-"antena após os dados serem recebidos pela estação de origem (exemplo. "
-"computador)."
+msgstr "Transmissor - Um transmissor, como dispositivo <emphasis>activo</emphasis>, inicia um sinal electromagnético, iniciando desta forma o processo da comunicação sem fios. Normalmente, o transmissor emite o sinal para uma antena após os dados serem recebidos pela estação de origem (exemplo. computador)."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "Antenna - An antenna acts as an intermediary device in a WLAN. Specifically, it can propagate a signal after it has been received from a transmitter as an AC signal and then <emphasis>passively</emphasis> creates the waveform for it to travel through the air. The actual shape and path that the electromagnetic waves take depends on the type of antenna, its intended purpose and its desired coverage area. An antenna also performs the reverse of this operation by receiving signals and passing them along to a receiver."
-msgstr ""
-"Antena - Uma antena actua como dispositivo intermidiário numa WLAN. "
-"Especificamente, consegue propagar o sinal depois de ter sido recebido por "
-"um transmissor como um sinal AC e então <emphasis>passivamente</emphasis> "
-"cria uma forma de onda que atravessa o ar. A forma e caminho actual que as "
-"ondas electromágneticas adquirem depende do tipo de antena, do propósito "
-"planeado e da área de cobertura pretendida. Uma antena também leva a cabo a "
-"operação inversa ao receber sinais e os enviar para o receptor."
+msgstr "Antena - Uma antena actua como dispositivo intermidiário numa WLAN. Especificamente, consegue propagar o sinal depois de ter sido recebido por um transmissor como um sinal AC e então <emphasis>passivamente</emphasis> cria uma forma de onda que atravessa o ar. A forma e caminho actual que as ondas electromágneticas adquirem depende do tipo de antena, do propósito planeado e da área de cobertura pretendida. Uma antena também leva a cabo a operação inversa ao receber sinais e os enviar para o receptor."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "Receiver - A receiver completes the electromagnetic communications in a WLAN by taking a signal (usually from an antenna) and passing it to the computer in a way it can understand (such as binary 1s and 0s)."
-msgstr ""
-"O receptor - O receptor completa as comunicações electromagnéticas numa WLAN "
-"ao captar o sinal (usualmente duma antena) e o enviar para o computador "
-"numa forma que possa ser entendido (tal como código binário 1s e 0s)."
+msgstr "O receptor - O receptor completa as comunicações electromagnéticas numa WLAN ao captar o sinal (usualmente duma antena) e o enviar para o computador numa forma que possa ser entendido (tal como código binário 1s e 0s)."
#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format,
+#, no-c-format,
msgid "Types of Cards"
msgstr "Tipos de placas"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Wireless client adapters allow desktop and mobile computers to join and communicate on a WLAN. Adapters are typically available in PCI, PCI Express, Mini-PCI, USB, ExpressCard, Cardbus and PCMCIA form. This chapter provides details and sample images of three of the most commonly used adapter types: USB, PCMCIA/Cardbus, and PCI."
-msgstr ""
-"Os adaptadores de redes sem fios permitem que os computadores fixos e os "
-"portáteis se possam ligar e comunicar numa WLAN. Os típicos adaptadores "
-"disponíveis são PCI, PCI Express, Mini-PCI, USB, ExpressCard, Cardbus and "
-"PCMCIA form. Este capítulo disponibiliza detalhes e exemplos de imagens dos "
-"três tipos de adaptadores mais comuns: USB, PCMCIA/Cardbus, and PCI."
+msgstr "Os adaptadores de redes sem fios permitem que os computadores fixos e os portáteis se possam ligar e comunicar numa WLAN. Os típicos adaptadores disponíveis são PCI, PCI Express, Mini-PCI, USB, ExpressCard, Cardbus and PCMCIA form. Este capítulo disponibiliza detalhes e exemplos de imagens dos três tipos de adaptadores mais comuns: USB, PCMCIA/Cardbus, and PCI."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "USB - These adapters are particularly useful for mobile users, allowing quick access for any machine with a USB port. They can be quickly set up and transferred between machines. The antenna is built into an integrated unit and the adapters are approximately the same size as a USB flash memory adapter:"
-msgstr ""
-"USB - Este tipo de adaptadores são particularmente úteis para os "
-"utilizadores que possuem dispositivos móveis, permitindo o acesso rápido de "
-"qualquer máquina que possua uma porta USB. Podem ser configurados "
-"rapidamente e transferidos entre máquinas. A antena é construída dentro de "
-"uma unidade integrada e os adaptadores têm aproximadamente o mesmo tamanho "
-"que um adaptador de memória flash USB :"
+msgstr "USB - Este tipo de adaptadores são particularmente úteis para os utilizadores que possuem dispositivos móveis, permitindo o acesso rápido de qualquer máquina que possua uma porta USB. Podem ser configurados rapidamente e transferidos entre máquinas. A antena é construída dentro de uma unidade integrada e os adaptadores têm aproximadamente o mesmo tamanho que um adaptador de memória flash USB :"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "PCMCIA/Cardbus - Designed for laptops, these adapters can have an integrated antenna; however, some models provide support for connecting an external antenna to modify signal requirements, or increase signal strength capabilities:"
-msgstr ""
-"PCMCIA/Cardbus - Desenhado para portáteis, estes adaptadores podem possuir "
-"uma antena integrada; contudo, alguns modelos disponibilizam suporte de como "
-"ligar uma antena externa para modificar os requisitos de sinal, ou aumentar "
-"a capacidade de força do sinal:"
+msgstr "PCMCIA/Cardbus - Desenhado para portáteis, estes adaptadores podem possuir uma antena integrada; contudo, alguns modelos disponibilizam suporte de como ligar uma antena externa para modificar os requisitos de sinal, ou aumentar a capacidade de força do sinal:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "PCI - These adapters are available for desktop machines with a standard PCI slot. They typically have an external antenna attached, and provide support for connecting antennas for specific signal requirements, or for increased signal strength:"
-msgstr ""
-"PCI - Estes adaptadores estão disponíveis para computadores de secretária "
-"que possuem slot standard PCI. Tipicamente têm uma antena externa "
-"incorporada, e disponibilizam suporte para ligar antenas com requirimentos "
-"de sinal específico, ou para aumentar a força do sinal:"
+msgstr "PCI - Estes adaptadores estão disponíveis para computadores de secretária que possuem slot standard PCI. Tipicamente têm uma antena externa incorporada, e disponibilizam suporte para ligar antenas com requirimentos de sinal específico, ou para aumentar a força do sinal:"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
@@ -124,41 +77,22 @@
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "There are three main antenna categories available for wireless LANs: <emphasis>Omnidirectional</emphasis>, <emphasis>Semidirectional</emphasis> and <emphasis>Highly directional</emphasis>."
-msgstr ""
-"Existem três categorias principais de antenas disponíveis para redes LANs "
-"sem fios: <emphasis>Omnidireccionais</emphasis>, <emphasis>Semi-"
-"direccionais</emphasis> e <emphasis>Altamente direccionais</emphasis>."
+msgstr "Existem três categorias principais de antenas disponíveis para redes LANs sem fios: <emphasis>Omnidireccionais</emphasis>, <emphasis>Semi-direccionais</emphasis> e <emphasis>Altamente direccionais</emphasis>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Omnidirectional - <emphasis>Omnidirectional antennas</emphasis> are designed to radiate a signal in all directions. Although it is impossible under the basic laws of physics for an antenna to perfectly radiate a signal in all directions at equal strength, an antenna of this type is an attempt to provide general coverage in all directions. This is the most common type found for client adapters and access points, as in these situations, good coverage in a general spherical area around the antenna is desirable."
-msgstr ""
-"Omnidireccional - <emphasis>Antenas omnidireccionais</emphasis> são "
-"designadas por propagar o sinal para todas as direcções. Embora seja "
-"impossível pelas leis básicas da física que uma antena propague um sinal "
-"perfeito em todas as direcções com a mesma força de sinal, uma antena deste "
-"tipo tenta disponibilizar uma cobertura geral em todas as direcções. Este "
-"método é o mais comum utilizado nos adaptadores e pontos de acesso, nestas "
-"situações, uma boa cobertura numa área esférica em redor da antena é "
-"desejável."
+msgstr "Omnidireccional - <emphasis>Antenas omnidireccionais</emphasis> são designadas por propagar o sinal para todas as direcções. Embora seja impossível pelas leis básicas da física que uma antena propague um sinal perfeito em todas as direcções com a mesma força de sinal, uma antena deste tipo tenta disponibilizar uma cobertura geral em todas as direcções. Este método é o mais comum utilizado nos adaptadores e pontos de acesso, nestas situações, uma boa cobertura numa área esférica em redor da antena é desejável."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Semidirectional - <emphasis>Semidirectional antennas</emphasis> are designed to provide specific, directed signal coverage over large areas. An example of a semidirectional antenna is a <emphasis>Yagi antenna</emphasis>."
-msgstr ""
-"Semi-direccional - <emphasis>Antenas semi-direccionais</emphasis> são "
-"designadas especificamente por disponibilizar, um sinal direccionado através "
-"de largas áreas. Um exemplo de uma antena semi-direccional é a "
-"<emphasis>Antena Yagi</emphasis>."
+msgstr "Semi-direccional - <emphasis>Antenas semi-direccionais</emphasis> são designadas especificamente por disponibilizar, um sinal direccionado através de largas áreas. Um exemplo de uma antena semi-direccional é a <emphasis>Antena Yagi</emphasis>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "Highly-directional - <emphasis>Highly directional</emphasis> antennas are used for point-to-point links; for example, between two buildings. They radiate a very narrow beam over a long distance, and are often used for dedicated links."
-msgstr ""
-"Altamente direccionais - Antenas <emphasis>altamente direccionais</emphasis> "
-"são usadas para ligações ponto-a-ponto; por exemplo entre dois edifícios. "
-"Este tipo de antenas propagam a uma longa distância um feixe espectro "
-"reduzido de luz, e são usualmente usados para ligações dedicadas."
+msgstr "Altamente direccionais - Antenas <emphasis>altamente direccionais</emphasis> são usadas para ligações ponto-a-ponto; por exemplo entre dois edifícios. Este tipo de antenas propagam a uma longa distância um feixe espectro reduzido de luz, e são usualmente usados para ligações dedicadas."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
@@ -168,45 +102,17 @@
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "Clients typically connect in one of two modes: <emphasis>adhoc</emphasis> or <emphasis>infrastructure</emphasis>. Adhoc mode involves stations communicating directly with each other without the need for a central point to manage communications. This is also known as peer-to-peer mode. The default and most common mode is known as Infrastructure mode. Infrastructure mode uses a Wireless Access Point (WAP), which is a central device that manages transmissions between clients. Refer to the following for more details on Access Points:"
-msgstr ""
-"Os clientes tipicamente efectuam uma ligação através de dois modos: "
-"<emphasis>adhoc</emphasis> ou <emphasis>infraestruturas</emphasis>. O modo "
-"Adhoc envolve estações de comunicações que comunicam directamente umas com "
-"as outras sem que seja necessário um ponto central que efectue a gestão das "
-"comunicações. Este modo também é conhecido por modo ponto-a-ponto. Por "
-"omissão o modo mais comum conhecido é o modo de infraestrutura. O modo de "
-"infrasestrutura usado é o WAP (Ponto acesso sem fios), que é um dispositivo "
-"central que gere as transmissões entre clientes. Consultar o ponto seguinte "
-"para mais detalhes sobre pontos de acesso:"
+msgstr "Os clientes tipicamente efectuam uma ligação através de dois modos: <emphasis>adhoc</emphasis> ou <emphasis>infraestruturas</emphasis>. O modo Adhoc envolve estações de comunicações que comunicam directamente umas com as outras sem que seja necessário um ponto central que efectue a gestão das comunicações. Este modo também é conhecido por modo ponto-a-ponto. Por omissão o modo mais comum conhecido é o modo de infraestrutura. O modo de infrasestrutura usado é o WAP (Ponto acesso sem fios), que é um dispositivo central que gere as transmissões entre clientes. Consultar o ponto seguinte para mais detalhes sobre pontos de acesso:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "From <ulink url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wireless_access_point\">Wikipedia.org</ulink>: <emphasis>In computer networking, a wireless access point (WAP) is a device that allows wireless communication devices to connect to a wireless network using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or related standards. The WAP usually connects to a wired network, and can relay data between the wireless devices (such as computers or printers) and wired devices on the network.</emphasis>"
-msgstr ""
-"No endereço <ulink url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wireless_access_point\">"
-"Wikipedia.org</ulink>:<emphasis>numa rede de computadores, o ponto de acesso "
-"sem fios (WAP) é um dispositivo que permite que dispositivos sem fios se "
-"liguem a uma rede sem fios utilizando standards Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ou outros "
-"relacionados. O WAP normalmente efectua a conexão a uma rede de cabo, e "
-"consegue retransmitir informação entre dispositivo sem fios (tais como "
-"computadores ou impressoras) e dispositivos ligados por cabo na "
-"rede.</emphasis>"
+msgstr "No endereço <ulink url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wireless_access_point\">Wikipedia.org</ulink>:<emphasis>numa rede de computadores, o ponto de acesso sem fios (WAP) é um dispositivo que permite que dispositivos sem fios se liguem a uma rede sem fios utilizando standards Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ou outros relacionados. O WAP normalmente efectua a conexão a uma rede de cabo, e consegue retransmitir informação entre dispositivo sem fios (tais como computadores ou impressoras) e dispositivos ligados por cabo na rede.</emphasis>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format, fuzzy
msgid "Access points commonly found in home environments provide different features from those found in business or corporate settings. Consumer-level WAPs are often integrated into broadband gateways, and multiple functions can be served from a single device. These functions typically include a switch for wired access, routing functionality, a broadband modem, and a network firewall. Usually an omnidirectional antenna is used, or multiple antennas, a scheme known as <emphasis>antenna diversity</emphasis>. WAPs often have a built-in web interface for their configuration which can be accessed by a web browser."
-msgstr ""
-"Os pontos de acesso geralmente encontrados em ambientes domésticos "
-"disponibilizam funcionalidades diferentes daqueles encontrados em ambientes "
-"de negócios ou empresas. WAPs do nível de consumidor são frequentemente "
-"integrados em gateways de banda larga, e numerosas funções podem ser "
-"servidos a partir de um único dispositivo. Estas funções tipicamente incluem "
-"um comutador para o acesso com fios, funcionalidade de roteamento, modem de "
-"banda larga, e uma Firewall da Rede. Usualmente uma antena omnidireccional "
-"é usada, ou múltiplas antenas, um esquema conhecido como "
-"<emphasis>diversidade de antena</emphasis>. WAPs muitas vezes têm uma "
-"interface baseada em navegadores para as configurações através da qual se "
-"acede via navegador web."
+msgstr "Os pontos de acesso geralmente encontrados em ambientes domésticos disponibilizam funcionalidades diferentes daqueles encontrados em ambientes de negócios ou empresas. WAPs do nível de consumidor são frequentemente integrados em gateways de banda larga, e numerosas funções podem ser servidos a partir de um único dispositivo. Estas funções tipicamente incluem um comutador para o acesso com fios, funcionalidade de roteamento, modem de banda larga, e uma Firewall da Rede. Usualmente uma antena omnidireccional é usada, ou múltiplas antenas, um esquema conhecido como <emphasis>diversidade de antena</emphasis>. WAPs muitas vezes têm uma interface baseada em navegadores para as configurações através da qual se acede via navegador web."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
@@ -218,11 +124,6 @@
msgid "802.11b and 802.11g (the most common) devices are usually referred to as operating at 2.4GHz (gigahertz). In fact, the signals for these devices can operate on one of eleven (11) distinct sections (or <emphasis>channels</emphasis>) within the 2.4GHz band. Some regions allow operation in thirteen (13) channels, however the U.S FCC defines eleven (11) channels. What this means is that you can configure your wireless adapter and access point to operate on slightly different frequencies than other networks in your area, to avoid interference and congestion. Each of these channels cover a frequency range of 22MHz; in other words, a device operating in each of these channels can operate at up to 11MHz on either side of the "center" frequencies listed in the following table."
msgstr ""
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "IEE 802.11b and 802.11g Channel Frequencies"
-msgstr ""
-
#. Tag: entry
#, no-c-format
msgid "Channel number"
@@ -342,3 +243,13 @@
#, no-c-format
msgid "If we study the frequencies used in these eleven (11) channels, and take into account that each channel can operate in 11MHz ranges either side (+/-) of its center frequency, the channels 1, 6 and 11 never overlap with each other. Channels that are separated by at least five other channels (or at least 2.5MHz) do not overlap. You can use this important piece of knowledge when you have wireless congestion issues; for example, in an apartment building with three wireless networks near each other, you can avoid congestion by getting the networks to run on channels that are sufficiently separated from each other, such as 1, 6 and 11. A heavily congested area may not provide the freedom to do this, however it is a useful thing to remember."
msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "This chapter gives an overview of some of the hardware available for wireless LANs, the role they play, and further details about their operation."
+msgstr "Este capítulo apresenta uma visão geral de algum hardware disponível para LANs sem fios, o papel que desempenham, e detalhes adicionais sobre o seu funcionamento."
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "IEE 802.11b and 802.11g Channel Frequencies"
+msgstr "Canais de frequências do IEE 802.11b e 802.11g"
1
0
Author: transif
Date: 2010-06-30 01:17:02 +0000 (Wed, 30 Jun 2010)
New Revision: 141
Modified:
community/f13/pt-PT/Introduction.po
Log:
l10n: Updates to Portuguese (pt) translation
Transmitted-via: Transifex (translate.fedoraproject.org)
Modified: community/f13/pt-PT/Introduction.po
===================================================================
--- community/f13/pt-PT/Introduction.po 2010-06-28 21:12:39 UTC (rev 140)
+++ community/f13/pt-PT/Introduction.po 2010-06-30 01:17:02 UTC (rev 141)
@@ -1,6 +1,5 @@
-#
# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
-#
+#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
@@ -12,11 +11,6 @@
"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Introduction"
-msgstr ""
-
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Due to increased demand for convenient networking and more flexible access to both the Internet and company resources via more geographically widespread coverage areas, wireless networking use has dramatically increased in recent years. Mobile access to data services previously unavailable is now common. The sales and penetration of wireless access have resulted in a recent projection by <ulink url=\"http://www.abiresearch.com/\">ABI Research</ulink> that one billion Wi-Fi chipsets <ulink url=\"http://www.abiresearch.com/press/1474-One+Billion+Wi-Fi+Chipsets+to+Ship+in…">will ship in the year 2011</ulink>."
@@ -32,21 +26,11 @@
msgid "This guide provides a high-level overview of the past, present, and future of IEEE 802.11 wireless networking standards, concepts, hardware components, security concerns, and their relation to &PRODUCT; Linux. Although the specific wireless technology based on IEEE 802.11 is the primary focus of this guide, other mobile technologies and their relation to &PRODUCT; and Linux are also mentioned. Parts of this guide contain detailed information specific to &PRODUCT; and other Linux operating systems, however, many of the topics and concepts relate to all operating systems, vendors, and environments."
msgstr ""
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Who should read this guide?"
-msgstr ""
-
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "You should read this guide if you are looking for an overview of wireless technologies and how they are implemented in &PRODUCT; or other Linux operating systems. Other readers will gain general information on how wireless works, the hardware involved, and other topics such as standards and security."
msgstr ""
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "What is a Wireless LAN?"
-msgstr ""
-
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "A wireless LAN (referred to as WLAN in this guide) is a wireless local area network that allows computers or other devices to communicate via radio frequency (RF) technology. It affords the user mobility to move around and stay connected to the network without using physical cables such as in a traditional Ethernet system."
@@ -72,21 +56,11 @@
msgid "Wireless LANs under the IEEE 802.11 specifications did not become widely used until the introduction of the 802.11b standard in 1999. With more available devices, higher data rates and cheaper hardware, wireless access has now become widespread. The IEEE recently ratified 802.11n. This amendment addresses several performance and security issues and is covered later in this guide."
msgstr ""
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Benefits of Wireless LANs"
-msgstr ""
-
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Wireless LANs offer mobility and convenience, allowing connections from nearly any location within the coverage area. Also, the installation of a WLAN is in many cases easier than a wired network, because of the lack of a need to install actual cables in wall fittings and data centers. A properly designed WLAN can be installed relatively quickly and can also be transported to a new location more easily."
msgstr ""
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Considerations"
-msgstr ""
-
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Wireless LANs introduce several deployment and usability factors that should be considered. An Ethernet system generally has its electrical current traveling neatly <emphasis>bounded</emphasis> inside a wire. As the elements that make up a WLAN depend heavily on communication via RF through the air, the fact that a WLAN is an <emphasis>unbounded</emphasis> medium introduces many factors. The performance and reliability of a wireless LAN is dependent on atmospheric conditions, physical obstructions, other WLANs, RF interference, RF propagation characteristics and the basic laws of physics. The use of a WLAN is therefore generally not as reliable or as fast as a wired system, however recent developments in the communications standards that actually use some of these atmospheric anomalies <emphasis>to their advantage</emphasis> have alleviated the problems to a degree. The reliability and performance of a WLAN depends on correct deployment which has all of these conditio
ns taken into account."
@@ -117,3 +91,27 @@
msgid "Any products pictured or otherwise referred to in this guide are provided for reference purposes only, and no endorsement or guarantees of supportability are intended."
msgstr ""
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Introduction"
+msgstr "Introdução"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Who should read this guide?"
+msgstr "Quem deve ler este guia?"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "What is a Wireless LAN?"
+msgstr "O que é uma rede sem fios?"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Benefits of Wireless LANs"
+msgstr "Benefícios das redes sem fios"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Considerations"
+msgstr "Considerações"
1
0
[virtualization-guide/f13] l10n: Updates to Spanish (Castilian) (es) translation
by Transifex System User 29 Jun '10
by Transifex System User 29 Jun '10
29 Jun '10
commit 9a3adcf31f2e3b8403ef362a3d4df037b72d74a3
Author: logan <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>
Date: Tue Jun 29 23:04:01 2010 +0000
l10n: Updates to Spanish (Castilian) (es) translation
Transmitted-via: Transifex (translate.fedoraproject.org)
es-ES/USB.po | 23 ++++++++++++++---------
1 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/es-ES/USB.po b/es-ES/USB.po
index 2f0bfe4..bea8576 100755
--- a/es-ES/USB.po
+++ b/es-ES/USB.po
@@ -1,22 +1,27 @@
-# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+# Fedora Spanish translation of Virtualization Guide.
#
+# Héctor Daniel Cabrera <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>, 2010.
+#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
-"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"Project-Id-Version: virtualization-guide\n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-04-21T14:26:41\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-04-21T14:26:41\n"
-"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
-"Language-Team: None\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29 20:02-0300\n"
+"Last-Translator: Héctor Daniel Cabrera <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>\n"
+"Language-Team: Fedora Spanish <trans-es(a)lists.fedoraproject.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
-"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"X-Poedit-Language: Spanish\n"
+"X-Poedit-Country: ARGENTINA\n"
#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format, fuzzy
+#, no-c-format
msgid "USB device passthrough"
-msgstr "Pasarela del dispositivo USB"
+msgstr "Frase de acceso del dispositivo USB"
#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format, fuzzy
+#, no-c-format
msgid "placeholder"
msgstr "sostenedor"
+
1
0
[virtualization-guide/f13] l10n: Updates to Spanish (Castilian) (es) translation
by Transifex System User 29 Jun '10
by Transifex System User 29 Jun '10
29 Jun '10
commit 36ca468b938bf9bd46c4d5cdd9240ae3362f0752
Author: logan <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>
Date: Tue Jun 29 23:03:16 2010 +0000
l10n: Updates to Spanish (Castilian) (es) translation
Transmitted-via: Transifex (translate.fedoraproject.org)
es-ES/NPIV.po | 19 +++++++++++--------
1 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/es-ES/NPIV.po b/es-ES/NPIV.po
index 6e02a8e..41a887e 100755
--- a/es-ES/NPIV.po
+++ b/es-ES/NPIV.po
@@ -1,24 +1,27 @@
+# Fedora Spanish translation of Virtualization Guide.
#
-# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+# Héctor Daniel Cabrera <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>, 2010.
#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
-"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"Project-Id-Version: virtualization-guide\n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-04-21T14:26:40\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-04-21T14:26:40\n"
-"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
-"Language-Team: None\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29 19:59-0300\n"
+"Last-Translator: Héctor Daniel Cabrera <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>\n"
+"Language-Team: Fedora Spanish <trans-es(a)lists.fedoraproject.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
-"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"X-Poedit-Language: Spanish\n"
+"X-Poedit-Country: ARGENTINA\n"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV)"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Virtualización de ID de N_Port (NPIV, por las iniciales en inglpes de N_Port ID Virtualization)"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Coming soon."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Pronto."
1
0
[virtualization-guide/f13] l10n: Updates to Spanish (Castilian) (es) translation
by Transifex System User 29 Jun '10
by Transifex System User 29 Jun '10
29 Jun '10
commit 227b70ee9c43e67a6b58c6443424ed310512f12f
Author: logan <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>
Date: Tue Jun 29 22:57:20 2010 +0000
l10n: Updates to Spanish (Castilian) (es) translation
Transmitted-via: Transifex (translate.fedoraproject.org)
es-ES/Misc_Administration.po | 271 +++++++++++++++++++++---------------------
1 files changed, 137 insertions(+), 134 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/es-ES/Misc_Administration.po b/es-ES/Misc_Administration.po
index 1c00223..e7a7d88 100755
--- a/es-ES/Misc_Administration.po
+++ b/es-ES/Misc_Administration.po
@@ -1,649 +1,652 @@
-#
-# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+# Fedora Spanish translation of Virtualization Guide.
+#
+# Héctor Daniel Cabrera <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>, 2010.
#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
-"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"Project-Id-Version: virtualization-guide\n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-04-21T14:26:40\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-04-21T14:26:40\n"
-"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
-"Language-Team: None\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29 19:54-0300\n"
+"Last-Translator: Héctor Daniel Cabrera <logan(a)fedoraproject.org>\n"
+"Language-Team: Fedora Spanish <trans-es(a)lists.fedoraproject.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
-"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"X-Poedit-Language: Spanish\n"
+"X-Poedit-Country: ARGENTINA\n"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Miscellaneous administration tasks"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Tareas de administración diversas"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This chapter contain useful hints and tips to improve virtualization performance, scale and stability."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El presente capítulo contiene trucos y consejos útiles para mejorar el desempeño, la adaptabilidad y la estabilidad de la virtualización. "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Automatically starting guests"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo iniciar los huéspedes automáticamente"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This section covers how to make virtualized guests start automatically during the host system's boot phase."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La sección presente describe cómo hacer para que los huéspedes virtualizados se inicien automáticamente durante la etapa del arranque del equipo anfitrión."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This example uses <command>virsh</command> to set a guest, <parameter>TestServer</parameter>, to automatically start when the host boots."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Nuestros ejemplos utilizan <command>virsh</command> para definir un huésped, <parameter>TestServer</parameter> para iniciarlo cuando el equipo arranca."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The guest now automatically starts with the host."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Ahora el huésped se inicia automáticamente junto con el equipo."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "To stop a guest automatically booting use the <parameter>--disable</parameter> parameter"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Para detener un huésped que se ha iniciado automáticamente en el arranque, utilice el parámetro <parameter>--disable</parameter>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The guest no longer automatically starts with the host."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El huésped no se iniciará automáticamente con el equipo."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Using qemu-img"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo utilizar qemu-img"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The <command>qemu-img</command> command line tool is used for formatting various file systems used by KVM. <command>qemu-img</command> should be used for formatting virtualized guest images, additional storage devices and network storage. <command>qemu-img</command> options and usages are listed below."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La herramienta de línea de comando <command>qemu-img</command> es utilizada para dar formato a numerosos sistemas de archivos utilizados por KVM. <command>qemu-img</command> debería utilizarse para formatear imágenes de huéspedes virtualizadas, dispositivos de almacenamiento adicionales y almacenamiento de red. A continuación ofrecemos una lista con las opciones y modos de utilización de <command>qemu-img</command>."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Formatting and creating new images or devices"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo crear y darle formato a nuevas imágenes o dispositivos"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Create the new disk image filename of size <parameter>size</parameter> and format <parameter>format</parameter>."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Genere el nombre de archivo para la la nueva imagen de disco del tamaño <parameter>size</parameter> y con el formato <parameter>format</parameter>. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If base_image is specified, then the image will record only the differences from base_image. No size needs to be specified in this case. base_image will never be modified unless you use the \"commit\" monitor command."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Se se ha especificado base_image, entonces la imagen grabará sólo las diferencias con respecto a base_image. En este caso no es necesario indicar un tamaño. base_image nunca será modificado, a menos que utilice el comando de monitor \"commit\"."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Convert an existing image to another format"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Convertir una imagen existente a un formato diferente "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The <parameter>convert</parameter> option is used for converting a recognized format to another image format."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La opción <parameter>convert</parameter> es utilizada para convertir un formato reconocido a "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Command format:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Formato del comando:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Convert the disk image <parameter>filename</parameter> to disk image <parameter>output_filename</parameter> using format <parameter>output_format</parameter>. The disk image can be optionally encrypted with the <parameter>-e</parameter> option or compressed with the <parameter>-c</parameter> option."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Convierta la imagen de disco <parameter>filename</parameter> existente a la nueva <parameter>output_filename</parameter> utilizando el formato <parameter>output_format</parameter>. De forma opcional, la imagen de disco puede cifrarse con la opción <parameter>-e</parameter>, o comprimirse con la opción <parameter>-c</parameter>. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Only the <filename>qcow</filename> format supports encryption or compression. the compression is read-only. it means that if a compressed sector is rewritten, then it is rewritten as uncompressed data."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Solo el formato <filename>qcow</filename> ofrece soporte para cifrado o compresión. La compresión ofrece solamente el modo lectura. Esto significa que si un sector comprimido es sobrescrito, entonces será sobrescrito como datos sin comprimir."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The encryption uses the AES format with very secure 128-bit keys. Use a long password (over 16 characters) to get maximum protection."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El cifrado utiliza el formato AES con llaves muy seguras de 128 bits. Utilice una contraseña extensa (más de 16 caracteres) para obtener la mayor protección."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Image conversion is also useful to get smaller image when using a format which can grow, such as <command>qcow</command> or <command>cow</command>. The empty sectors are detected and suppressed from the destination image."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La conversión de imágenes también es útil para obtener imágenes más pequeñas cuando se esté utilizando un formato que puede expandirse, como es por ejemplo <command>qcow</command> o <command>cow</command>. Los sectores vacíos son detectados y suprimidos de la imagen de destino."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "getting image information"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo obtener la información de la imagen"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "the <command>info</command> parameter displays information about a disk image. the format for the <command>info</command> option is as follows:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El parámetro <command>info</command> muestra información acerca de la imagen de disco. El formato para la opción <command>info</command> es el siguiente:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "give information about the disk image filename. use it in particular to know the size reserved on disk which can be different from the displayed size. if vm snapshots are stored in the disk image, they are displayed too."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Ofrece información acerca del archivo de la imagen de disco. Utilícelo especialmente para conocer el tamaño reservado en el disco, y que puede ser diferente que el del tamaño indicado. Si las capturas de MV son almacenados en la imagen del disco, ello también serán visualizados. "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Supported formats"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Formatos soporttados"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The format of an image is usually guessed automatically. The following formats are supported:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El formato de una imagen, por lo general es adivinado de manera automática. Existe soporte para los siguientes formatos:"
#. Tag: term
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>raw</command>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<command>raw</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Raw disk image format (default). This format has the advantage of being simple and easily exportable to all other emulators. If your file system supports holes (for example in ext2 or ext3 on Linux or NTFS on Windows), then only the written sectors will reserve space. Use <command>qemu-img info</command> to know the real size used by the image or <command>ls -ls</command> on Unix/Linux."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Formato de imagen de disco raw (predeterminado). Este formato posee la ventaja de ser sencillo y fácilmente exportable hacia el resto de los emuladores. Si su sistema de archivos soporta huecos (por ejemplo ext2 o ext3 en LInux, o NTFS en Windows), entonces sólo los sectores escritos podrán reservar espacio. Utilice el comando <command>qemu-img info</command> para conocer el tamaño real utilizado por la imagen, o <command>ls -ls</command> en Unix/Linux."
#. Tag: term
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>qcow2</command>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<command>qcow2</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "QEMU image format, the most versatile format. Use it to have smaller images (useful if your file system does not supports holes, for example: on Windows), optional AES encryption, zlib based compression and support of multiple VM snapshots."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El formato más versátil, el formato de imagen QEMU. Utilícelo para poseer imágenes más pequeñas (muy útil si su sistema de archivos no ofrece soporte para huecos, por ejemplo, con algunas versiones de Windows). De manera opcional ofrece cifrado AES, compresión basada en zlib, y soporte de numerosas capturas de MV. "
#. Tag: term
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>qcow</command>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<command>qcow</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Old QEMU image format. Only included for compatibility with older versions."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Antiguo formato de imagen QEMU. Sólo se ofrece por cuestiones de compatibilidad con versiones anteriores."
#. Tag: term
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>cow</command>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<command>cow</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "User Mode Linux Copy On Write image format. The <command>cow</command> format is included only for compatibility with previous versions. It does not work with Windows."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Formato de imagen del modo de usuario Linux \"Copy on Write\". El formato <command>cow</command> se ofrece sólo por cuestiones de compatibilidad con versiones anteriores. No funciona con Windows. "
#. Tag: term
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>vmdk</command>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<command>vmdk</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "VMware 3 and 4 compatible image format."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Formato de imagen compatible con VMware 3 y 4."
#. Tag: term
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>cloop</command>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<command>cloop</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Linux Compressed Loop image, useful only to reuse directly compressed CD-ROM images present for example in the Knoppix CD-ROMs."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Linux Compressed Loop image, útil solo para reutilizar directamente imágenes de CD-ROM comprimidas, como por ejemplo las que se utilizan en los CD-ROMs de la distribución Knoppix."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Overcommitting with KVM"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Sobrealojamiento con KVM"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The KVM hypervisor supports overcommitting CPUs and overcommitting memory. Overcommitting is allocating more virtualized CPUs or memory than there are physical resources on the system. With CPU overcommit, under-utilized virtualized servers or desktops can run on fewer servers which saves power and money."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El hipervisor de KVM ofrece soporte para sobrealojar CPUs y memoria. Se denomina sobrealojamiento al hecho de alojar más CPUs virtualizadases, o más memoria, que la que exista físicamente en los recursos del sistema. Con un sobrealojamiento de CPUs, los servidores o sistemas de escritorio que no se estén utilizando podrán ejecutarse sobre menor cantidad de servidores, ahorrando así dinero y energía. "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Overcommitting memory"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo sobrealojar memoria"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Most operating systems and applications do not use 100% of the available RAM all the time. This behavior can be exploited with KVM to use more memory for virtualized guests than what is physically available."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La mayoría de las aplicaciones y de los sistemas operativos no utilizan permanentemente el 100 % de la memoria RAM disponible. Esta conducta puede aprovecharse con KVM para que utilice más memoria de la que dispone físicamente para los huéspedes virtualizados."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "With KVM, virtual machines are Linux processes. Guests on the KVM hypervisor do not have blocks of physical RAM assigned to them instead they function as processes. Each process is allocated memory when it requests more memory. KVM uses this to allocate memory for guests when the guest operating system requests more or less memory. The guest only uses slightly more physical memory than the virtualized operating system appears to use."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Con KVM, las máquinas virtuales son procesos Linux. Los huéspedes en el hipervisor KVM no poseen bloques de memoria física RAM asignados, y en su lugar, funcionan como procesos. Cada proceso aloja memoria en la medida que la necesite. KVM utiliza esta característica para poder alojar la memoria que necesiten los huéspedes, en la medida que el sus sistemas operativos así lo requieran. El huésped utilizará solo un poco más de la memoria física que el sistema operativo virtualizado. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "When physical memory is nearly completely used or a process is inactive for some time, Linux moves the process's memory to swap. Swap is usually a partition on a hard disk drive or solid state drive which Linux uses to extend virtual memory. Swap is significantly slower than RAM."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cuando la memoria física esté a punto de ser utilizada completamente, o cuando un proceso se encuentre inactivo durante un período de tiempo prolongado, Linux traslada esta memoria al especio de intercambio (swap). Por lo general swap es una partición del disco rígido que LInux utiliza para ectender la memoria virtual. Swap es notoriamente más lento que la memoria RAM."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "As KVM virtual machines are Linux processes, memory used by virtualized guests can be put into swap if the guest is idle or not in heavy use. Memory can be committed over the total size of the swap and physical RAM. This can cause issues if virtualized guests use their total RAM. Without sufficient swap space for the virtual machine processes to be swapped to the <command>pdflush</command> process, the cleanup process, starts. <command>pdflush</command> kills processes to free memory so the system does not crash. <command>pdflush</command> may destroy virtualized guests or other system processes which may cause file system errors and may leave virtualized guests unbootable."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Como las máquinas virtuales KVM son procesos Linux, la memoria utilizada por los huéspedes virtualizados puede ser colocada en swap, en caso que el huésped se encuentre inactivo, o sin una utilización importante. La memoria puede ser alojada superando el tamaño total de la memoria RAM física, o el espacio swap. Esto puede provocar inconvenientes si los huéspedes virtualizados utilizan la totalidad de la memorira RAM que se les ha asignado. Si no existe disponible suficiente espacio swap que permita que los procesos virtuales puedan ser \"swapeados\", se inicia <command>pdflush</command>, el proceso de limipieza. <command>pdflush</command> finaliza procesos de modo de poder liberar la menoria, evitando así una caída del sistema. <command>pdflush</command> podría destruir huéspedes virtualizados u otros sistemas operativos, y esto podría generar errores en el sistema de archivos, y hacer que algunos huéspedes no puedan volver a iniciarse."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Warning"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Advertencia"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If sufficient swap is not available guest operating systems will be forcibly shut down. This may leave guests inoperable. Avoid this by never overcommitting more memory than there is swap available."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Si no existe disponible suficiente swap, el sistema operativo huésped se apagará de manera forzada. Esto podría dejar a los huéspedes inoperables. Esto puede evitarlo si se cuida de no sobrealojar mayor cantidad de memoria que la cantidad disponible de espacio swap."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The swap partition is used for swapping underused memory to the hard drive to speed up memory performance. The default size of the swap partition is calculated from amount of RAM and overcommit ratio. It is recommended to make your swap partition larger if you intend to overcommit memory with KVM. A recommended overcommit ratio is 50% (0.5). The formula used is:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La partición swap es utilizada para \"swapear\" al disco rígido memoria sin utilizar de modo de poder acelerar el desempeño de la memoria. El tamaño predeterminado de la partición swap es calculado con la cantidad de memoria RAM y la tasa de sobrealojamiento. Si tiene intenciones de sobrealojar memoria con KVM, es recomendable generar una partición swap mayor para su sistema. Una tasa de sobrealojamiento recomendada es del 50% (0.5). La fótmula utilizada es la siguiente: "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Red Hat <ulink url=\"http://kbase.redhat.com/faq/docs/DOC-15252\">Knowledgebase</ulink> has an article on safely and efficiently determining the size of the swap partition."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El <ulink url=\"http://kbase.redhat.com/faq/docs/DOC-15252\">Centro de documentación</ulink> de Red Hat posee un artículo relacionado con la manera de poder determinar segura y eficientemente el tamaño de la partición swap. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "It is possible to run with an overcommit ratio of ten times the number of virtualized guests over the amount of physical RAM in the system. This only works with certain application loads (for example desktop virtualization with under 100% usage). Setting overcommit ratios is not a hard formula, you must test and customize the ratio for your environment."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Es posible ejecutar un sistema con una tasa de sobrealojamiento que, con respecto a la cantidad de memoria RAM física presente, sea diez veces mayor que la cantidad de huéspedes virtualizados. Esto solo funciona con la carga de determinadas aplicaciones (por ejemplo, virtualizaciones de escritorio que no estén utilizándose al 100%). La fórmula para poder configurar tasas de sobrealojamiento no es complicada, pero debe probarla y personalizarla de acuerdo a su entorno. "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Overcommitting virtualized CPUs"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo sobrealojar CPUs virtualizados"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The KVM hypervisor supports overcommitting virtualized CPUs. Virtualized CPUs can be overcommitted as far as load limits of virtualized guests allow. Use caution when overcommitting VCPUs as loads near 100% may cause dropped requests or unusable response times."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El hipervisor KVM ofrece soporte para sobrealojar CPUs virtualizados. Pueden sobrealojarse tanto como lo permitan los límites de carga de los huéspedes virtualizados. Sea cauteloso cuando realice sobrealojamientos de CPUs virtualizados, ya que las cargas cercanas al 100% del límite pueden provocar peticiones de desconexión, o tiempos de respuesta inutilizables."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Virtualized CPUs are overcommitted best when each virtualized guest only has a single VCPU. The Linux scheduler is very efficient with this type of load. KVM should safely support guests with loads under 100% at a ratio of five VCPUs. Overcommitting single VCPU virtualized guests is not an issue."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El sobrealojamiento de CPUs virtualizados se realiza mejor cuando cada uno de los huéspedes virtualizados posee solo un CPU virtualizado. El planificador de Linux es muy eficiente con este tipo de carga. KVM debería soportar de manera segura a huéspedes con cargas menores al 100%, con una tasa de hasta cinco CPUs virtualizados. Sobrealojar un huésped virtualizado de un solo CPU virtualizado no es un problema."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "You cannot overcommit symmetric multiprocessing guests on more than the physical number of processing cores. For example a guest with four VCPUs should not be run on a host with a dual core processor. Overcommitting symmetric multiprocessing guests in over the physical number of processing cores will cause significant performance degradation."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "No es posible sobrealojar huéspedes de multiprocesadores simétricos cuya cantidad de CPUs sea mayor a la de los núcleos de procesamiento físicos del sistema. Por ejemplo, un huésped con cuatro CPUs virtualizados no debería ser ejecutado en un equipo con un procesador de núcleo doble. Sobrealojar huéspedes de multiprocesadores simétricos en estas condiciones provocará una notable disminución en el desempeño de todo el sistema. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Assigning guests VCPUs up to the number of physical cores is appropriate and works as expected. For example, running virtualized guests with four VCPUs on a quad core host. Guests with less than 100% loads should function effectively in this setup."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Asignar la misma cantidad de CPUs de huéspedes virtualizados que la de los núcleos de procesamiento físicos del sistema es adecuado y funciona perfectamente. Por ejemplo, ejecutar huéspedes virtualizados con cuatro CPUs virtualizados sobre un equipo con un procesador de cuatro núcleos. Los huéspedes con menos del 100% de carga deberían funcionar eficientemente en este esquema de configuración."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Always test first"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Primero realice pruebas, siempre"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Do not overcommit memory or CPUs in a production environment without extensive testing. Applications which use 100% of memory or processing resources may become unstable in overcommitted environments. Test before deploying."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "No sobrealoje memoria o CPUs en un entorno de producción, sin haber realizado primero las verificaciones adecuadas. Las aplicaciones que utilizan el 100% de la memoria o de los recursos de procesamiento, podrían tornarse inestables en entornos sobrealojados. Verifique antes de implementar."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Verifying virtualization extensions"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo verificar las extensiones de virtualización"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Use this section to determine whether your system has the hardware virtualization extensions. Virtualization extensions (Intel VT or AMD-V) are required for full virtualization."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Utilice esta sección para determinar si su sistema posee o no las extensiones de virtualización de hardware. Estas extensiones (Intel VT o AMD-V) son necesarias para una virtualización completa. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Run the following command to verify the CPU virtualization extensions are available:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Ejecute el siguiente comando para verificar que se encuentren disponibles las extensiones de virtualización:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Analyze the output."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Analice el resultado."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The following output contains a <computeroutput>vmx</computeroutput> entry indicating an Intel processor with the Intel VT extensions:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El siguiente resultado contiene una entrada <computeroutput>vmx</computeroutput> indicando la existencia de un procesador Intel con las extensiones VT: "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The following output contains an <computeroutput>svm</computeroutput> entry indicating an AMD processor with the AMD-V extensions:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El siguiente resultado contiene una entrada <computeroutput>svm</computeroutput> indicando la existencia de un procesador AMD con las extensiones AMD-V: "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If any output is received, the processor has the hardware virtualization extensions. However in some circumstances manufacturers disable the virtualization extensions in BIOS."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Si cualquiera de estos resultados es el que ha obtenido, el procesador posee las extensiones de virtualización de hardware. Sin embargo, en algunas circunstancias, los fabricantes deshabilitan estas extensiones en el BIOS."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The \"<computeroutput>flags:</computeroutput>\" output content may appear multiple times, once for each hyperthread, core or CPU on the system."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El contenido de la salida \"<computeroutput>flags:</computeroutput>\" podría aparecer numerosas veces, una vez para cada hyperthread, núcleo, o CPU del sistema."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The virtualization extensions may be disabled in the BIOS. If the extensions do not appear or full virtualization does not work refer to <xref linkend=\"proc-Virtualization-Enabling_Intel_VT_and_AMD_V_virtualization_hardware_extensions_in_BIOS-Enabling_virtualization_extensions_in_BIOS\" />."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Las extensiones de virtualización podrían estar deshabilitadas en el BIOS. Si las extensiones no aparecen, o una virtualización completa no funciona, diríjase a <xref linkend=\"proc-Virtualization-Enabling_Intel_VT_and_AMD_V_virtualization_hardware_extensions_in_BIOS-Enabling_virtualization_extensions_in_BIOS\" />."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "For users of the KVM hypervisor"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Para usuarios del hipervisor KVM"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If the kvm package is installed. I As an additional check, verify that the <computeroutput>kvm</computeroutput> modules are loaded in the kernel:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Si el paquete kvm se encuentra instalado, como una verificación adicional, compruebe que los módulos <computeroutput>kvm</computeroutput> se encuentran cargados en el kernel:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If the output includes <computeroutput>kvm_intel</computeroutput> or <computeroutput>kvm_amd</computeroutput> then the <computeroutput>kvm</computeroutput> hardware virtualization modules are loaded and your system meets requirements. sudo"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Si el resultado incluye <computeroutput>kvm_intel</computeroutput> o <computeroutput>kvm_amd</computeroutput>, entonces los módulos <computeroutput>kvm</computeroutput> de virtualización de hardware se encuentran cargados, y su sistema cumple los requerimientos necesarios."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Additional output"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Resultados adicionales"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If the <package>libvirt</package> package is installed, the <command>virsh</command> command can output a full list of virtualization system capabilities. Run <command>virsh capabilies</command> as root to receive the complete list."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Si el paquete <package>libvirt</package> ha sido instalado, el comando <command>virsh</command> puede ofrecer un resultado con la lista completa de capacidades de virtualización del sistema. Ejecute el comando command>virsh capabilies</command> como usuario root para conocerla."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Accessing data from a guest disk image"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo acceder a los datos desde una imagen de huésped de disco"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "There are various methods for accessing the data from guest image files. One common method is to use the <command>kpartx</command> tool, covered by this section, to mount the guest file system as a loop device which can then be accessed."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Existen numerosos métodos para acceder a los datos desde archivos de imagen de huésped. Uno muy conocido es el de utilizar la herramienta <command>kpartx</command>, descrita en esta sección, de modo de poder montar el sistema de archivos huésped comu un dispositivo de bucle al que puede accederse."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The <command>kpartx</command> command creates device maps from partition tables. Each guest storage image has a partition table embedded in the file."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El comando <command>kpartx</command> genera mapeos de dispositivos desde tablas de partición. Cada imagen de almacenamiento de huésped posee una tabla de partición incrustada en el archivo."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The <package>libguestfs</package> and <package>guestfish</package> packages, avilable from the <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/EPEL\">EPEL</ulink> repository, allow advanced modification and access to guest file systems. The <package>libguestfs</package> and <package>guestfish</package> packages are not covered in this section at this time."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Los paquetes <package>libguestfs</package> y <package>guestfish</package>, disponibles en el repositorio <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/EPEL\">EPEL</ulink>, permiten modificaciones avanzadas y acceso a los sistema de archivos del huésped. Los paquetes <package>libguestfs</package> y <package>guestfish</package> no son descritos en esta sección."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Guests must be offline before their files can be read. Editing or reading files of an active guest is not possible and may cause data loss or damage."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Los huéspedes deben estar desconectados antes que sus archivos puedan ser leídos. No es posible ni editar ni leer los archivos de un huésped activo, e intentarlo podría causar pérdida de datos o daños."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Accessing guest image data"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo acceder a los datos de la imagen del huésped"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Install the <package>kpartx</package> package."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Instale el paquete <package>kpartx</package>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Use kpartx to list partition device mappings attached to a file-based storage image. This example uses a image file named <replaceable>guest1.img</replaceable>."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Utilice kpartx para conocer los mapeos de los dispositivos de particionamiento asociados a una imagen de almacenamiento basada en archivo. El siguiente ejemplo utiliza un archivo de imagen denominado <replaceable>guest1.img</replaceable>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "<replaceable>guest1</replaceable> is a Linux guest. The first partition is the boot partition and the second partition is an EXT3 containing the root partition."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<replaceable>guest1</replaceable> es un huésped Linux. La primer partición es la partición de arranque, y la segunda es de formato EXT3 y es la partición raíz (root)."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Add the partition mappings to the recognized devices in <filename>/dev/mapper/</filename>."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Agregue los mapeos de partición a los dispositivos reconocidos en <filename>/dev/mapper/</filename>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Test that the partition mapping worked. There should be new devices in the /dev/mapper/ directory"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Verifique que funcione el mapeo de las particiones. Deberían existir nuevos dispositivos en el directorio /dev/mapper/. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The mappings for the image are named in the format <filename>loopXpY</filename>."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Los mapeos para la imagen son denominados con el formato <filename>loopXpY</filename>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Mount the loop device which to a directory. If required, create the directory. This example uses <filename>/mnt/guest1</filename> for mounting the partition."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Monte el dispositivo de bucle en un directorio. Si es necesario, genere el directorio. El ejemplo que damos a continuación utiliza al directorio <filename>/mnt/guest1</filename> para montar la partición."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The files are now avialable for reading in the <filename>/mnt/guest1</filename> directory. Read or copy the files."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Los archivos ahora se encuentran disponibles para ser leídos en el directorio <filename>/mnt/guest1</filename>. Léalos, o cópielos."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Unmount the device so the guest image can be reused by the guest. If the device is mounted the guest cannot access the image and therefore cannot start."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Desmonte el dispositivo de manera que la imagen de huésped pueda ser reutilizada por él. Si el dispositivo se encuentra montado, el huésped no podrá acceder a la imagen, y por lo tanto, no podrá iniciarse."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Disconnnect the image file from the partition mappings."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Desconecte el archivo de imagen de los mapeos de partición."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The guest can now be restarted."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Ahora el huésped puede ser reiniciado."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Accessing data from guest LVM volumes"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo acceder a los datos desde volúmenes de huéspedes LVM"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Many Linux guests use Logical Volume Management (LVM) volumes. Additional steps are required to read data on LVM volumes on virtual storage images."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Numerosos huéspedes Linux utilizan volúmenes de Logical Volume Management (LVM). Se necesitan algunos pasos adicionales para leer datos de volúmenes LVM de imágenes de almacenamiento virtual."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Add the partition mappings for the <replaceable>guest1.img</replaceable> to the recognized devices in the <filename>/dev/mapper/</filename> directory."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Agregue los mapeos de partición para el <replaceable>guest1.img</replaceable> a los dispositivos reconocidos en el directorio <filename>/dev/mapper/</filename>. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "In this example the LVM volumes are on a second partition. The volumes require a rescan with the <command>vgscan</command> command to find the new volume groups."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "En nuestro ejemplo, los volúmenes LVM se encuentran en una segunda partición. Los volúmenes necesitan de otro análisis con el comando <command>vgscan</command>, para que pueda encontrar los nuevos grupos de volúmenes."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Activate the volume group on the partition (called <filename>VolGroup00</filename> by default) with the <command>vgchange -ay</command> command."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Active el grupo de volúmenes en la partición (denominada <filename>VolGroup00</filename> por defecto), con el comando <command>vgchange -ay</command>. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Use the <command>lvs</command> command to display information about the new volumes. The volume names (the <computeroutput>LV</computeroutput> column) are required to mount the volumes."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Utilice el comando <command>lvs</command> para observar información relacionada con los nuevos volúmenes. Los nombres de estos volúmenes (la columna <computeroutput>LV</computeroutput>) son necesarios para poder montarlos."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Mount <filename>/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00</filename> in the <filename>/mnt/guestboot/</filename> directory."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Monte el volumen <filename>/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00</filename> en el directorio <filename>/mnt/guestboot/</filename>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The files are now avialable for reading in the <filename>/mnt/guestboot</filename> directory. Read or copy the files."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Ahora los archivos se encuentran disponibles para ser leídos en el directorio <filename>/mnt/guestboot</filename>. Léalos o cópielos. "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Disconnect the volume group <replaceable>VolGroup00</replaceable>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Desconecte el grupo de volúmenes <replaceable>VolGroup00</replaceable>"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Generating a new unique MAC address"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo generar una nueva y única dirección MAC "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "In some case you will need to generate a new and unique <firstterm linkend=\"glos-Virtualization-MAC_Addresses\">MAC address</firstterm> for a guest. There is no command line tool available to generate a new MAC address at the time of writing. The script provided below can generate a new MAC address for your guests. Save the script to your guest as <filename>macgen.py</filename>. Now from that directory you can run the script using <command>./macgen.py</command> and it will generate a new MAC address. A sample output would look like the following:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "En algunos casos, será necesario generar una nueva y única <firstterm linkend=\"glos-Virtualization-MAC_Addresses\">dirección MAC</firstterm> para un huésped. Hasta el momento de la redacción de esta guía, no existe aún una herramienta de línea de comandos disponible para hacerlo. El script que ofrecemos a continuación puede hacerlo. Guárdelo para que sea utilizado por su huésped como <filename>macgen.py</filename>. Ahora, desde ese directorio podrá ejecutar el script utilizando el comando <command>./macgen.py</command>, y una nueva dirección MAC será generada. Una salida de ejemplo debería parecerse a la siguiente: "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Another method to generate a new MAC for your guest"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Otro método para generar una nueva dirección MAC para su huésped"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "You can also use the built-in modules of <command>python-virtinst</command> to generate a new MAC address and <command>UUID</command> for use in a guest configuration file:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "También puede utilizar los módulos de <command>python-virtinst</command> para generar una nueva dirección MAC, y <command>UUID</command> para utilizar en un archivo de configuración de huésped:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The script above can also be implemented as a script file as seen below."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El script anterior puede también ser implementado como un archivo, de acuerdo a lo que se muestra más abajo."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Very Secure <systemitem class=\"daemon\">ftpd</systemitem>"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<systemitem class=\"daemon\">ftpd</systemitem> muy seguro "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "<systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem> can provide access to installation trees for para-virtualized guests (for example, the Fedora repositories) or other data. If you have not installed <systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem> during the server installation you can grab the RPM package from your <filename>Server</filename> directory of your installation media and install it using the <command>rpm -ivh vsftpd*.rpm</command> (note that the RPM package must be in your current directory)."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "<systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem> puede ofrecer acceso hacia árboles de instalación desde un huésped para-virtualizado (por ejemplo, los repositorios de Fedora), o hacia otro tipo de datos. Si durante la instalación del servidor no ha instalado <systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem>, puede utilizar el paquete RPM desde el directorio <filename>Server</filename> de su medio de instalación, e instalarlo utilizando el comando <command>rpm -ivh vsftpd*.rpm</command> (tenga en cuenta que el paquete RPM debe estar en su directorio actual)."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "To configure <systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem>, edit <filename>/etc/passwd</filename> using <command>vipw</command> and change the ftp user's home directory to the directory where you are going to keep the installation trees for your para-virtualized guests. An example entry for the FTP user would look like the following:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Para configurar <systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem>, edite el archivo <filename>/etc/passwd</filename> utilizando <command>vipw</command>, y modifique el directorio personal del usuario ftp hacia el directorio en donde va a conservar los árboles de instalación para ser utilizados por sus huéspedes para-virtualizados. Una entrada modelo del usuario FTP debería parecerse a la siguiente:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Verify that <systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem> is not enabled using the <command>chkconfig --list vsftpd</command>:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Verifique que <systemitem class=\"daemon\">vsftpd</systemitem> no esté habilitado utilizando el comando <command>chkconfig --list vsftpd</command>:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Run the <command>chkconfig --levels 345 vsftpd on</command> to start vsftpd automatically for run levels 3, 4 and 5."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Ejecute el comando <command>chkconfig --levels 345 vsftpd on</command> para iniciar automáticamente vsftpd en los niveles de ejecución 3, 4 y 5."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Use the <command>chkconfig --list vsftpd</command> command to verify the <command>vsftpd</command> daemon is enabled to start during system boot:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Utilice el comando <command>chkconfig --list vsftpd</command> para verificar que el demonio <command>vsftpd</command> esté habilitado para iniciarse junto con el arranque del sistema:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "use the <command>service vsftpd start vsftpd</command> to start the vsftpd service:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Utilice el comando <command>service vsftpd start vsftpd</command> para iniciar el servicio vsftpd:"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Configuring LUN Persistence"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo configurar persistencia LUN"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This section covers how to implement <firstterm linkend=\"glos-Virtualization-LUN\">LUN</firstterm> persistence in guests and on the host machine with and without multipath."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La presente sección describe como implementar persistencia <firstterm linkend=\"glos-Virtualization-LUN\">LUN</firstterm> sobre huéspedes y sobre el equipo anfitrión con y sin multipath."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Implementing LUN persistence without multipath"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo implementar persistencia LUN sin multipath"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "If your system is not using multipath, you can use <command>udev</command> to implement LUN persistence. Before implementing LUN persistence in your system, ensure that you acquire the proper UUIDs. Once you acquire these, you can configure LUN persistence by editing the <command>scsi_id</command> file that resides in the <command>/etc </command> directory. Once you have this file open in a text editor, you must comment out this line:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Si su sistema no está utilizando multipath, puede utilizar <command>udev</command> para implementar una persistencia LUN. Antes de implementar persistencia LUN en su sistema, asegúrese que ha adquirido los UUIDs adecuados. Una vez que lo haya hecho, puede configurar persistencia LUN editando el archivo <command>scsi_id</command> dentro del directorio <command>/etc </command>. Una vez que haya abierto este archivo con un editor de textos, debe comentar la siguiente línea:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Then replace it with this parameter:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Luego reemplácela con el siguiente parámetro:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This tells udev to monitor all system SCSI devices for returning UUIDs. To determine the system UUIDs, use the <command>scsi_id</command> command:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Esto le indica a udev que vigile a todos los dispositivos SCSI del sistema en busca de UUIDs. Para determinar los UUIDs del sistema, utilice el comando <command>scsi_id</command>:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The long string of characters in the output is the UUID. The UUID does not change when you add a new device to your system. Acquire the UUID for each device in order to create rules for the devices. To create new device rules, edit the <command>20-names.rules</command> file in the <command>/etc/udev/rules.d </command> directory. The device naming rules follow this format:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "La cadena de caracteres más larga de la salida es el UUID. El UUID no se modifica cuando se agreguen nuevos dispositivos en el sistema. Obtenga el UUID de cada dispositivo para luego poder crear reglas para cada uno de ellos. Para crear nuevas reglas de dispositivos, edite el archivo <command>20-names.rules</command> del directorio <command>/etc/udev/rules.d </command>. La forma de denominar a las reglas de dispositivos tiene el siguiente formato: "
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Replace your existing <parameter>UUID</parameter> and <parameter>devicename</parameter> with the above UUID retrieved entry. The rule should resemble the following:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Reemplace sus propios <parameter>UUID</parameter> y <parameter>devicename</parameter> con los obtenidos en la entrada del UUID de recién. La regla debería parecerse a la siguiente:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This enables all devices that match the <command>/dev/sd*</command> pattern to inspect the given UUID. When it finds a matching device, it creates a device node called <parameter> /dev/devicename</parameter>. For this example, the device node is <parameter>/dev/mydevice </parameter>. Finally, append the <command>/etc/rc.local</command> file with this line:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Esto habilita a todos los dispositivos que se correspondan con el patrón <command>/dev/sd*</command> a ser inspeccionados en busca del UUID dado. Cuando encuentre un dispositivo coincidente, crea un dispositivo de nodo denominado <parameter> /dev/devicename</parameter>. En nuestro ejemplo, el nodo de dispositivo es <parameter>/dev/mydevice </parameter>. Por último, agregue la siguiente línea en el archivo <command>/etc/rc.local</command>: "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Implementing LUN persistence with multipath"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo implementar persistencia LUN con multipath"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "To implement LUN persistence in a multipath environment, you must define the alias names for the multipath devices. For this example, you must define four device aliases by editing the <command>multipath.conf</command> file that resides in the <command>/etc/</command> directory:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Para implementar una persistenacia LUN en un entorno multipath, primero debe definir los nombres apodos para los dispositivos multipath. En nuestro ejemplo, debe definir cuatro apodos para dispositivos editando el archivo <command>multipath.conf</command> dentro del directorio <command>/etc/</command>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This defines 4 LUNs: <command> /dev/mpath/oramp1</command>, <command>/dev/mpath/oramp2</command>, <command>/dev/mpath/oramp3</command>, and <command>dev/mpath/oramp4</command>. The devices will reside in the <command>/dev/mpath </command> directory. These LUN names are persistent after reboots as it creates aliased names on the wwid for each of the LUNs."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Esto define 4 LUNs: <command> /dev/mpath/oramp1</command>, <command>/dev/mpath/oramp2</command>, <command>/dev/mpath/oramp3</command>, y <command>dev/mpath/oramp4</command>. Los dispositivos se ubicarán en el directorio <command>/dev/mpath </command>. Estos nombres LUN serán persistentes luego de reiniciarse, ya que se crean los apodos para los nombres en el wwid para cada uno de los LUNs. "
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Disable SMART disk monitoring for guests"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Deshabilitar monitoreo de discos SMART para los huéspedes"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "SMART disk monitoring can be disabled as we are running on virtual disks and the physical storage is managed by the host."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "El monitoreo de discos SMART puede deshabilitarse ya que estamos ejecutando sobre discos virtuales, y el almacenamiento físico es administrado por el equipo."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Configuring a VNC Server"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Cómo configurar un servidor VNC"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "To configure a VNC server use the <guimenuitem>Remote Desktop</guimenuitem> application in <guimenu>System</guimenu> > <guimenu>Preferences</guimenu>. Alternatively, you can run the <command>vino-preferences</command> command."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Para configurar un servidor VNC utilice la aplicación <guimenuitem>Escritorio remote</guimenuitem> dentro del menú <guimenu>Sistema</guimenu> > <guimenu>Preferencias</guimenu>. De forma alternativa, puede ejecutar el comando <command>vino-preferences</command>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "The following steps set up a dedicated VNC server session:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Las siguientes etapas configuran una sesión de servidor dedicado VNC:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Edit the <filename>~/.vnc/xstartup</filename> file to start a GNOME session whenever <application>vncserver</application> is started. The first time you run the <application>vncserver</application> script it will ask you for a password you want to use for your VNC session."
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Edite el archivo <filename>~/.vnc/xstartup</filename> para iniciar una sesión GNOME cada vez que <application>vncserver</application> sea iniciado. La primera vez que ejecute el script <application>vncserver</application>, se le preguntará si desea utilizar una contraseña con su sesión VNC."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "A sample <command>xstartup</command> file:"
-msgstr ""
+msgstr "Un ejemplo de archivo <command>xstartup</command>:"
1
0
[translation-quick-start-guide] POT and POs updated for new chapter of Translating Wiki
by Noriko Mizumoto 28 Jun '10
by Noriko Mizumoto 28 Jun '10
28 Jun '10
commit 348390ee69e463ed909233cceb0cfa41b99b6a2f
Author: Noriko Mizumoto <noriko(a)noriko.csb>
Date: Tue Jun 29 14:21:14 2010 +1000
POT and POs updated for new chapter of Translating Wiki
bs-BA/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
de-DE/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
el-GR/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
es-ES/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
fr-FR/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
hu-HU/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
id-ID/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
it-IT/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
ja-JP/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
ko-KR/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
ms-MY/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
nl-NL/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
pa-IN/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
pl-PL/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
pot/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.pot | 4 +-
pot/Author_Group.pot | 4 +-
pot/Book_Info.pot | 4 +-
pot/Introduction.pot | 4 +-
pot/Translating_Documentation.pot | 4 +-
pot/Translating_Software.pot | 4 +-
pot/Translating_Websites.pot | 4 +-
pot/Translating_Wiki.pot | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
pt-BR/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
pt-PT/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
ru-RU/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po | 84 +++++++-------
ru-RU/Translating_Software.po | 226 +++++++++++++++++-----------------
ru-RU/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
sr-RS/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
sv-SE/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
uk-UA/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
zh-CN/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po | 84 +++++++-------
zh-CN/Author_Group.po | 38 +++---
zh-CN/Translating_Documentation.po | 98 ++++++++--------
zh-CN/Translating_Software.po | 226 +++++++++++++++++-----------------
zh-CN/Translating_Websites.po | 20 ++--
zh-CN/Translating_Wiki.po | 114 ++++++++++++++++++
36 files changed, 2910 insertions(+), 402 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/bs-BA/Translating_Wiki.po b/bs-BA/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/bs-BA/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/de-DE/Translating_Wiki.po b/de-DE/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/de-DE/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/el-GR/Translating_Wiki.po b/el-GR/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/el-GR/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/es-ES/Translating_Wiki.po b/es-ES/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/es-ES/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/fr-FR/Translating_Wiki.po b/fr-FR/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fr-FR/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/hu-HU/Translating_Wiki.po b/hu-HU/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/hu-HU/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/id-ID/Translating_Wiki.po b/id-ID/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/id-ID/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/it-IT/Translating_Wiki.po b/it-IT/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/it-IT/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/ja-JP/Translating_Wiki.po b/ja-JP/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ja-JP/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/ko-KR/Translating_Wiki.po b/ko-KR/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ko-KR/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/ms-MY/Translating_Wiki.po b/ms-MY/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ms-MY/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/nl-NL/Translating_Wiki.po b/nl-NL/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/nl-NL/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/pa-IN/Translating_Wiki.po b/pa-IN/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/pa-IN/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/pl-PL/Translating_Wiki.po b/pl-PL/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/pl-PL/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/pot/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.pot b/pot/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.pot
index 9108b45..0b9618f 100644
--- a/pot/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.pot
+++ b/pot/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Author_Group.pot b/pot/Author_Group.pot
index 783df4c..d6e1d25 100644
--- a/pot/Author_Group.pot
+++ b/pot/Author_Group.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Book_Info.pot b/pot/Book_Info.pot
index fdaf1c1..5f3d760 100644
--- a/pot/Book_Info.pot
+++ b/pot/Book_Info.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Introduction.pot b/pot/Introduction.pot
index dbc1b41..8fd1527 100644
--- a/pot/Introduction.pot
+++ b/pot/Introduction.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Translating_Documentation.pot b/pot/Translating_Documentation.pot
index 14340ba..d7af0ff 100644
--- a/pot/Translating_Documentation.pot
+++ b/pot/Translating_Documentation.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Translating_Software.pot b/pot/Translating_Software.pot
index cb3e2d5..f089f76 100644
--- a/pot/Translating_Software.pot
+++ b/pot/Translating_Software.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Translating_Websites.pot b/pot/Translating_Websites.pot
index 8292f22..31947b2 100644
--- a/pot/Translating_Websites.pot
+++ b/pot/Translating_Websites.pot
@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
diff --git a/pot/Translating_Wiki.pot b/pot/Translating_Wiki.pot
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/pot/Translating_Wiki.pot
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/pt-BR/Translating_Wiki.po b/pt-BR/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/pt-BR/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/pt-PT/Translating_Wiki.po b/pt-PT/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/pt-PT/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/ru-RU/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po b/ru-RU/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po
index 27cb8f0..60af4cb 100644
--- a/ru-RU/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po
+++ b/ru-RU/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: ru\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugs.kde.org\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-04-24 00:29+0400\n"
"Last-Translator: kruvalig <kruvalig(a)gmail.com>\n"
"Language-Team: fedora-trans-ru\n"
@@ -23,6 +23,11 @@ msgstr ""
msgid "Accounts and Subscriptions"
msgstr "Учетные записи и подписки"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "To become a Fedora Translator, you must sign up for accounts and subscriptions as described in this chapter. If you have questions, post them on the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list, or ask for help via Internet Relay Chat, or <acronym>IRC</acronym>, at <systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> on channel <systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem>."
+msgstr "Чтобы стать переводчиком Fedora вам необходимо создать учетную запись что описывается в данной главе. При возникновении вопросов размещайте их на fedora-trans-list, или задавайте вопросы в ретранслируемом интернет чате или <acronym>IRC</acronym>, на <systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> на канале <systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem>."
+
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Subscribing to the Mailing List"
@@ -58,6 +63,11 @@ msgstr "Если у вас уже есть ключ SSH, вы можете ис
msgid "Enter the following command:"
msgstr "Введите следующую команду:"
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
+msgstr "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Accept the default location (<filename>~/.ssh/id_rsa</filename>) and enter a passphrase."
@@ -78,6 +88,17 @@ msgstr "Вам потребуется парольная фраза для фи
msgid "Change permissions to your key and <filename>.ssh</filename> directory:"
msgstr "Измените права доступа к ключу и директории <filename>.ssh</filename>:"
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid ""
+"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
+msgstr ""
+"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This public key (~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub) will be used for your Fedora account creation described in <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Accounts_and_Subscriptions-Applying_for_an_Account\" />."
@@ -93,6 +114,11 @@ msgstr "Создание GPG ключа"
msgid "Generate a key by typing in a command line:"
msgstr "Сгенерируйте ключ, набрав в консоли:"
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
+msgstr "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "A series of prompts guides you through the process. The default values suffice in almost all cases. Remember to choose a good password."
@@ -125,9 +151,19 @@ msgstr "не является паролем к какой либо другой
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
+msgid "In the resulting text, find your key ID in the statement that resembles <literal>pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C</literal>. Your key ID is the 8 character <guilabel>word</guilabel> after the slash (<literal>/</literal>). In the previous example, the GPG Key ID is <literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>. Write down your key ID."
+msgstr "В тексте вывода найдите ваш key ID который выглядит примерно так 'pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C'. Ваш key ID это 8 символов типа 'word' следующих за слешем (<literal>/</literal>). В приведенном примере GPG Key ID это <literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>. Запишите ваш key ID."
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
msgid "Export your public key to a public server so that others can find it with the following command, substituting your key ID:"
msgstr "Экспортируйте ваш открытый ключ на публичный сервер, что бы другие могли найти его. Выполните следующую команду, заменив key ID на свой."
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
+msgstr "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This GPG key ID will be used for your Fedora account creation described in <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Accounts_and_Subscriptions-Applying_for_an_Account\" />."
@@ -218,6 +254,11 @@ msgstr "Представьтесь"
msgid "Create a personal page at <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/User:Username\" />. This is very useful for Fedora contributors to get to know and contact each other."
msgstr "Создайте профиль на странице <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/User:Username\"/>. Участникам проекта Fedora полезно знакомиться и поддерживать связь друг с другом."
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Post a short self introduction to the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list and to the list of your local team with instructions from <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/L10N_Self_introduction\" />. Please remember to include your FAS user name and your language. With this information, sponsor can identify you for <guilabel>cvsl10n</guilabel> group joining approval."
+msgstr "Коротко представьтесь в списке рассылки <systemitem>fedora-trans-list</systemitem> и списке рассылки русской команды перевода <systemitem>trans-ru</systemitem>, составив сообщение, как описано в <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Ru_RU/L10N_Self_introduction\" />. Не забудьте, пожалуйста, указать свой ник в учетной системе Fedora и свой язык. По этим данным координатор найдет вашу заявку на вступление в группу «cvsl10n»."
+
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Joining the <systemitem>cvsl10n</systemitem> Group"
@@ -267,44 +308,3 @@ msgstr "Поздравляем"
#, no-c-format
msgid "Sit back and enjoy your achievement. You are now a fully recognized member of the Fedora community, capable of digitally signing documents and emails, submitting contributions, publishing content on the wiki, submitting bugs, following the discussions of our groups and joining other Fedora teams."
msgstr "Отдохните и насладитесь своими достижениями. Теперь вы являетесь членом Fedora сообщества, можете делать цифровые подписи документов и писем, размещать содержимое в ВиКи, сообщать об ошибках, участвовать в обсуждении наших групп и присоединиться к другой команде Fedora."
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Post a short self introduction to the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list and to the list of your local team with instructions from <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/L10N_Self_introduction\" />. Please remember to include your FAS user name and your language. With this information, sponsor can identify you for <guilabel>cvsl10n</guilabel> group joining approval."
-msgstr "Коротко представьтесь в списке рассылки <systemitem>fedora-trans-list</systemitem> и списке рассылки русской команды перевода <systemitem>trans-ru</systemitem>, составив сообщение, как описано в <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Ru_RU/L10N_Self_introduction\" />. Не забудьте, пожалуйста, указать свой ник в учетной системе Fedora и свой язык. По этим данным координатор найдет вашу заявку на вступление в группу «cvsl10n»."
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "To become a Fedora Translator, you must sign up for accounts and subscriptions as described in this chapter. If you have questions, post them on the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list, or ask for help via Internet Relay Chat, or <acronym>IRC</acronym>, at <systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> on channel <systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem>."
-msgstr "Чтобы стать переводчиком Fedora вам необходимо создать учетную запись что описывается в данной главе. При возникновении вопросов размещайте их на fedora-trans-list, или задавайте вопросы в ретранслируемом интернет чате или <acronym>IRC</acronym>, на <systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> на канале <systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem>."
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "In the resulting text, find your key ID in the statement that resembles <literal>pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C</literal>. Your key ID is the 8 character <guilabel>word</guilabel> after the slash (<literal>/</literal>). In the previous example, the GPG Key ID is <literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>. Write down your key ID."
-msgstr "В тексте вывода найдите ваш key ID который выглядит примерно так 'pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C'. Ваш key ID это 8 символов типа 'word' следующих за слешем (<literal>/</literal>). В приведенном примере GPG Key ID это <literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>. Запишите ваш key ID."
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
-msgstr "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
-msgstr "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid ""
-"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
-msgstr ""
-"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
-msgstr "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
diff --git a/ru-RU/Translating_Software.po b/ru-RU/Translating_Software.po
index 82a4d9e..a7dc7f7 100644
--- a/ru-RU/Translating_Software.po
+++ b/ru-RU/Translating_Software.po
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: ru\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugs.kde.org\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-04-07 03:08+0800\n"
"Last-Translator: Misha Shnurapet <zayzayats(a)yandex.ru>\n"
"Language-Team: Russian <fedora-trans-ru(a)redhat.com>\n"
@@ -31,123 +31,103 @@ msgstr "Данная глава поясняет, как переводить м
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Obtaining and Translating Projects"
-msgstr "Получение и перевод модулей"
+msgid "Prepare the Directory for Download"
+msgstr "Подготовка каталога к загрузке"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "If any error message appears, correct it before commit."
-msgstr "При возникновении ошибок исправьте их прежде чем зафиксировать"
-
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Committing Projects"
-msgstr "Фиксирование изменений модулей"
+msgid "To find which projects are translatable, visit the project list at <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/\" />."
+msgstr "Чтобы узнать, какие проекты доступны для перевода, ознакомьтесь с их списком <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/\" />."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Once you finish translation work, commit the file using the same interface."
-msgstr "Как только вы закончили работу над переводом, зафиксируйте файл, используя тот же интерфейс."
+msgid "Before you download any files, prepare the directory to hold files. The described structure below is an example only, and your structure can be formed differently."
+msgstr "Прежде чем загружать файлы продумайте структуру для хранения файлов. Ниже описывается такая структура, но вы можете сформировать другую, более удобную для себя. "
-#. Tag: title
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Login"
-msgstr "Войти"
+msgid "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
+msgstr "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Submit"
-msgstr "Фиксация перевода"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "To proofread your translation as part of the software, follow these steps:"
-msgstr "Если вы желаете проверить качество вашего перевода, выполните следующие шаги:"
+msgid "Obtaining and Translating Projects"
+msgstr "Получение и перевод модулей"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Change directory to the package you want to proofread. For example,"
-msgstr "Перейдите в каталог пакета, который вы хотите вычитать. Например:"
+msgid "Now that you have prepared a directory structure, you can download a file to translate. You may need to communicate with other translators in your language team to avoid conflict. If you are not sure, please contact your language coordinator. Also locking a file will avoid conflict."
+msgstr "Теперь, когда вы приготовили структуру каталогов, вы можете загрузить файлы для перевода. Возможно вам нужно будет связаться с другими переводчиками вашей группы для того что бы избежать конфликтов при переводе. Если вы не уверены, сообщите координатору языковой группы. Также зарезервируйте файл за собой, чтобы избежать конфликтов при переводе."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "First, back up the existing file:"
-msgstr "Сначала создайте резервную копию существующего файла:"
+msgid "Visit your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
+msgstr "Перейдите на страницу языка <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ru/\" /> и выберите желаемый выпуск ОС. Вас перенаправит на страницу этого выпуска, например, <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ru/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Now move the file converted for proofreading."
-msgstr "Теперь переместите преобразованный файл для вычитывания."
+msgid "Scroll down the page to find the table of all projects available for that release. Use the down-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Download po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project to download the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file as the name of your choice to the directory you created in the previous section (e.g. <filename class=\"extension\">abrt.po</filename>)."
+msgstr "Прокрутите вниз до таблицы всех доступных в этом выпуске проектов. Щелкните на значке с изображением стрелки, направленной вниз, и всплывающей подсказкой <guibutton>Download ru.po</guibutton> или подобной рядом с любым модулем, чтобы загрузить соответствующий файл <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> в папку, созданную вами в предыдущем разделе. <!-- НЕ ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ ЦВЕТА, Т.К. ЭТО НЕПРИЯТНО ЛЮДЯМ С ОСЛАБЛЕННЫМ ЗРЕНИЕМ. ВМЕСТО ЭТОГО ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ МЕТКИ. -->"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Exit root user."
-msgstr "Выход из под root."
+msgid "Now the file is ready for translation. Translate the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file into your language with a <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> editor of your choice such as <application>Lokalize</application> or <application>gtranslator</application>."
+msgstr "Теперь файл готов для перевода. Переведите <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл на ваш язык и любом редакторе <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файлов, таком как <application>Lokalize</application> или <application>gtranslator</application> или <application>poEditor</application>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Proofread the package with the translated strings as part of the application:"
-msgstr "Вычитайте пакет с переведенными строками в составе приложения:"
+msgid "Check the integrity of your file before commit."
+msgstr "Проверьте синтаксис нового файла перед фиксацией:"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The application related to the translated package runs with the translated strings."
-msgstr "Приложение, относящееся к переведенному пакету, будет запущено с переведенными строками."
+msgid "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgstr "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "To find which projects are translatable, visit the project list at <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/\" />."
-msgstr "Чтобы узнать, какие проекты доступны для перевода, ознакомьтесь с их списком <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/\" />."
+msgid "If any error message appears, correct it before commit."
+msgstr "При возникновении ошибок исправьте их прежде чем зафиксировать"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Prepare the Directory for Download"
-msgstr "Подготовка каталога к загрузке"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
-msgstr "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Before you download any files, prepare the directory to hold files. The described structure below is an example only, and your structure can be formed differently."
-msgstr "Прежде чем загружать файлы продумайте структуру для хранения файлов. Ниже описывается такая структура, но вы можете сформировать другую, более удобную для себя. "
+msgid "Committing Projects"
+msgstr "Фиксирование изменений модулей"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Now that you have prepared a directory structure, you can download a file to translate. You may need to communicate with other translators in your language team to avoid conflict. If you are not sure, please contact your language coordinator. Also locking a file will avoid conflict."
-msgstr "Теперь, когда вы приготовили структуру каталогов, вы можете загрузить файлы для перевода. Возможно вам нужно будет связаться с другими переводчиками вашей группы для того что бы избежать конфликтов при переводе. Если вы не уверены, сообщите координатору языковой группы. Также зарезервируйте файл за собой, чтобы избежать конфликтов при переводе."
+msgid "Once you finish translation work, commit the file using the same interface."
+msgstr "Как только вы закончили работу над переводом, зафиксируйте файл, используя тот же интерфейс."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Go back to your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
msgstr "Перейдите обратно на страницу вашего языка <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ru/\" /> и выберите желаемый выпуск. Вас перенаправит на страницу этого выпуска, — например, <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ru/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Scroll down the page to find the table of all projects available for that release. Use the down-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Download po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project to download the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file as the name of your choice to the directory you created in the previous section (e.g. <filename class=\"extension\">abrt.po</filename>)."
-msgstr "Прокрутите вниз до таблицы всех доступных в этом выпуске проектов. Щелкните на значке с изображением стрелки, направленной вниз, и всплывающей подсказкой <guibutton>Download ru.po</guibutton> или подобной рядом с любым модулем, чтобы загрузить соответствующий файл <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> в папку, созданную вами в предыдущем разделе. <!-- НЕ ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ ЦВЕТА, Т.К. ЭТО НЕПРИЯТНО ЛЮДЯМ С ОСЛАБЛЕННЫМ ЗРЕНИЕМ. ВМЕСТО ЭТОГО ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ МЕТКИ. -->"
+msgid "Login"
+msgstr "Войти"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Visit your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
-msgstr "Перейдите на страницу языка <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ru/\" /> и выберите желаемый выпуск ОС. Вас перенаправит на страницу этого выпуска, например, <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ru/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
+msgid "At the top of the page, select <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> to visit the <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> page, if not logged in yet. Authenticate with your Fedora Account System user name and password."
+msgstr "Наверху странице нажмите <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> что бы перейти к странице <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel>. Войдите в систему введя имя пользователя и пароль."
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Check the integrity of your file before commit."
-msgstr "Проверьте синтаксис нового файла перед фиксацией:"
+msgid "Submit"
+msgstr "Фиксация перевода"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Now the file is ready for translation. Translate the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file into your language with a <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> editor of your choice such as <application>Lokalize</application> or <application>gtranslator</application>."
-msgstr "Теперь файл готов для перевода. Переведите <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл на ваш язык и любом редакторе <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файлов, таком как <application>Lokalize</application> или <application>gtranslator</application> или <application>poEditor</application>."
+msgid "Use the up-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Send a translation for po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project, and click the browse button to locate your translated file."
+msgstr "Щелкните на значке с изображением стрелки, направленной вверх, и всплывающей подсказкой <guibutton>Submit a translation for po/ru.po</guibutton> или подобной рядом с модулем, затем щелкните кнопку <guibutton>Обзор</guibutton>, чтобы указать расположение переведенного модуля. <!-- НЕ ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ ЦВЕТА, Т.К. ЭТО НЕПРИЯТНО ЛЮДЯМ С ОСЛАБЛЕННЫМ ЗРЕНИЕМ. ВМЕСТО ЭТОГО ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ МЕТКИ. -->"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
-msgstr "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgid "Click the <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to commit your translated file."
+msgstr "Нажмите <guibutton>Send</guibutton> для фиксации переведенного файла."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
@@ -171,21 +151,6 @@ msgstr "Экран системы Transifex для Вьетнамского яз
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "At the top of the page, select <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> to visit the <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> page, if not logged in yet. Authenticate with your Fedora Account System user name and password."
-msgstr "Наверху странице нажмите <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> что бы перейти к странице <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel>. Войдите в систему введя имя пользователя и пароль."
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Use the up-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Send a translation for po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project, and click the browse button to locate your translated file."
-msgstr "Щелкните на значке с изображением стрелки, направленной вверх, и всплывающей подсказкой <guibutton>Submit a translation for po/ru.po</guibutton> или подобной рядом с модулем, затем щелкните кнопку <guibutton>Обзор</guibutton>, чтобы указать расположение переведенного модуля. <!-- НЕ ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ ЦВЕТА, Т.К. ЭТО НЕПРИЯТНО ЛЮДЯМ С ОСЛАБЛЕННЫМ ЗРЕНИЕМ. ВМЕСТО ЭТОГО ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ МЕТКИ. -->"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to commit your translated file."
-msgstr "Нажмите <guibutton>Send</guibutton> для фиксации переведенного файла."
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
msgid "Scroll down to the bottom, the section called <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> can be found if any of particular project(s) has been untranslated and no <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file created ever for this language."
msgstr "Прокрутите вниз до раздела называющегося <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel>. Данный раздел присутствует если проект непереведен и не был создан <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл для данного языка."
@@ -196,8 +161,8 @@ msgstr "Экран системы Transifex для Вьетнамского яз
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Since Fedora 12, the composed live image has been available to download for reviewing and correcting software translation in user interface. This live image is composed around a week before Fedora Software Translation Deadline and made available by deadline date. This image should include all latest translation submitted at this point."
-msgstr "Начиная с Fedora 12 формируется live образ что того чтобы просмотреть и откорретировать переводы программного обеспечения в работе. Данный live образ формируется примерно за неделю до Fedora Software Translation Deadline и доступен вплоть до deadline. Этот образ должен вкллючать все последнии переводы вносимые на этот момент."
+msgid "To add new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>, click the component to add in <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> section. It brings up the page of that project's component."
+msgstr "Чтобы добавить новый <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл, нажмите компонент для добавления раздела <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel>. ЧТо позволит отобразить страницу с компонентом этого проекта."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
@@ -206,13 +171,24 @@ msgstr "Главная страница проекта ABRT отображае
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "To add new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>, click the component to add in <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> section. It brings up the page of that project's component."
-msgstr "Чтобы добавить новый <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл, нажмите компонент для добавления раздела <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel>. ЧТо позволит отобразить страницу с компонентом этого проекта."
+msgid "Under <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> section, there is the source file. Using down-arrow icon to download the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file. Change the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file to <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file for your language translation."
+msgstr "Под разделом <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> есть файл источник. С помощью ярлычка в виде стрелочки вниз загрузите <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> файл. Измените <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> файл на <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> для вашего языка."
+
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid ""
+"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgstr ""
+"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Under <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> section, there is the source file. Using down-arrow icon to download the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file. Change the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file to <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file for your language translation."
-msgstr "Под разделом <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> есть файл источник. С помощью ярлычка в виде стрелочки вниз загрузите <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> файл. Измените <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> файл на <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> для вашего языка."
+msgid "Once you finish the translation, click on the <guilabel>Add a new translation</guilabel> button at that project's component page, expanding <guilabel>Add a translation file</guilabel> pane."
+msgstr "По завершении перевода нажмите <guilabel>Add a new translation</guilabel> на странице проекта с помощью панели <guilabel>Add a translation file</guilabel>."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
@@ -221,8 +197,8 @@ msgstr "На главной странице проекта ABRT отображ
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Once you finish the translation, click on the <guilabel>Add a new translation</guilabel> button at that project's component page, expanding <guilabel>Add a translation file</guilabel> pane."
-msgstr "По завершении перевода нажмите <guilabel>Add a new translation</guilabel> на странице проекта с помощью панели <guilabel>Add a translation file</guilabel>."
+msgid "Click <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button of <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> to locate your translated <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file. In the field of <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel>, type your new file name comforming with the structure instructed (e.g. po/vi.po). Enter the approriate message, and then click <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to submit."
+msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> для <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> для того чтобы указать переведенный <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл. В поле <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel> наберите имя нового файла удовлетворяющего разработанной структуре (например po/vi.po). Введите соответствуюющее сообщение и нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Send</guibutton> для фиксации изменении."
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
@@ -231,65 +207,89 @@ msgstr "Вычитывание текста"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button of <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> to locate your translated <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file. In the field of <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel>, type your new file name comforming with the structure instructed (e.g. po/vi.po). Enter the approriate message, and then click <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to submit."
-msgstr "Нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> для <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> для того чтобы указать переведенный <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> файл. В поле <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel> наберите имя нового файла удовлетворяющего разработанной структуре (например po/vi.po). Введите соответствуюющее сообщение и нажмите кнопку <guibutton>Send</guibutton> для фиксации изменении."
+msgid "Since Fedora 12, the composed live image has been available to download for reviewing and correcting software translation in user interface. This live image is composed around a week before Fedora Software Translation Deadline and made available by deadline date. This image should include all latest translation submitted at this point."
+msgstr "Начиная с Fedora 12 формируется live образ что того чтобы просмотреть и откорретировать переводы программного обеспечения в работе. Данный live образ формируется примерно за неделю до Fedora Software Translation Deadline и доступен вплоть до deadline. Этот образ должен вкллючать все последнии переводы вносимые на этот момент."
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "As a root user, overwrite the existing <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file in <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename>."
-msgstr "С правами root пользователя перепишите <filename class=\"extension\">.mo</filename> файл на место <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename>."
+msgid "To proofread your translation as part of the software, follow these steps:"
+msgstr "Если вы желаете проверить качество вашего перевода, выполните следующие шаги:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Convert the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file to a <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file using <command>msgfmt</command> with <option>-o</option> option:"
-msgstr "Преобразуйте <filename class=\"extension\">.po</filename> файл в <filename class=\"extension\">.mo</filename> файл с помощью команды <command>msgfmt</command> с параметром <option>-o</option>:"
+msgid "Change directory to the package you want to proofread. For example,"
+msgstr "Перейдите в каталог пакета, который вы хотите вычитать. Например:"
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ja_JP.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
-msgstr "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ru_RU.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
+msgid "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
+msgstr "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>mv <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</command>"
-msgstr "<command>mv <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</command>"
+msgid "Convert the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file to a <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file using <command>msgfmt</command> with <option>-o</option> option:"
+msgstr "Преобразуйте <filename class=\"extension\">.po</filename> файл в <filename class=\"extension\">.mo</filename> файл с помощью команды <command>msgfmt</command> с параметром <option>-o</option>:"
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid ""
-"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
-msgstr ""
-"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgid "<command>msgfmt -o system-config-printer.mo <replaceable>ja</replaceable>.po</command>"
+msgstr "<command>msgfmt -o system-config-printer.mo <replaceable>ja</replaceable>.po</command>"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
-msgstr "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
+msgid "As a root user, overwrite the existing <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file in <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename>."
+msgstr "С правами root пользователя перепишите <filename class=\"extension\">.mo</filename> файл на место <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename>."
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "First, back up the existing file:"
+msgstr "Сначала создайте резервную копию существующего файла:"
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>msgfmt -o system-config-printer.mo <replaceable>ja</replaceable>.po</command>"
-msgstr "<command>msgfmt -o system-config-printer.mo <replaceable>ja</replaceable>.po</command>"
+msgid "<command>su -</command>"
+msgstr "<command>su -</command>"
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>cp /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/<replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo-backup</command>"
msgstr "<command>cp /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/<replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo-backup</command>"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Now move the file converted for proofreading."
+msgstr "Теперь переместите преобразованный файл для вычитывания."
+
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>su -</command>"
-msgstr "<command>su -</command>"
+msgid "<command>mv <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</command>"
+msgstr "<command>mv <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</command>"
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Exit root user."
+msgstr "Выход из под root."
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>exit</command>"
msgstr "<command>exit</command>"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Proofread the package with the translated strings as part of the application:"
+msgstr "Вычитайте пакет с переведенными строками в составе приложения:"
+
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ja_JP.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
+msgstr "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ru_RU.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The application related to the translated package runs with the translated strings."
+msgstr "Приложение, относящееся к переведенному пакету, будет запущено с переведенными строками."
+
#~ msgid "Adding New .po File"
#~ msgstr "Добавление нового .po файла"
diff --git a/ru-RU/Translating_Wiki.po b/ru-RU/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ru-RU/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/sr-RS/Translating_Wiki.po b/sr-RS/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sr-RS/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/sv-SE/Translating_Wiki.po b/sv-SE/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/sv-SE/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/uk-UA/Translating_Wiki.po b/uk-UA/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/uk-UA/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
diff --git a/zh-CN/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po b/zh-CN/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po
index 76ffcc8..8f41feb 100644
--- a/zh-CN/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po
+++ b/zh-CN/Accounts_And_Subscriptions.po
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: zh_CN\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugs.kde.org\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2009-07-03 18:36+0800\n"
"Last-Translator: ZhangWei <sir.zhangwei(a)gmail.com>\n"
"Language-Team: Simplified Chinese <i18n-translation(a)lists.linux.net.cn>\n"
@@ -19,6 +19,11 @@ msgstr ""
msgid "Accounts and Subscriptions"
msgstr "帐号和订阅"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "To become a Fedora Translator, you must sign up for accounts and subscriptions as described in this chapter. If you have questions, post them on the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list, or ask for help via Internet Relay Chat, or <acronym>IRC</acronym>, at <systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> on channel <systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem>."
+msgstr "要成为 Fedora 翻译贡献人员，您必须按照本章的描述来注册帐号和订阅。如果您有疑问，可将问题发送到 <systemitem>trans</systemitem> 邮件列表或者通过 Internet Relay Chat(<acronym>IRC</acronym>)，在<systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> 站点的<systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem> 频道寻求帮助。"
+
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Subscribing to the Mailing List"
@@ -54,6 +59,11 @@ msgstr "如果您已经有SSH密钥，你可以在Fedora 工作中使用它。
msgid "Enter the following command:"
msgstr "输入以下命令："
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
+msgstr "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Accept the default location (<filename>~/.ssh/id_rsa</filename>) and enter a passphrase."
@@ -74,6 +84,17 @@ msgstr "您必须用您的密码提交翻译。如果您忘记则无法恢复。
msgid "Change permissions to your key and <filename>.ssh</filename> directory:"
msgstr "修改你的密钥及<filename>.ssh</filename>目录的权限："
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid ""
+"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
+msgstr ""
+"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
+"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This public key (~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub) will be used for your Fedora account creation described in <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Accounts_and_Subscriptions-Applying_for_an_Account\" />."
@@ -89,6 +110,11 @@ msgstr "生成GPG密钥"
msgid "Generate a key by typing in a command line:"
msgstr "生成密钥请在命令行中输入："
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
+msgstr "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "A series of prompts guides you through the process. The default values suffice in almost all cases. Remember to choose a good password."
@@ -121,9 +147,19 @@ msgstr "不要和用在其它系统中的任何密码相同"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
+msgid "In the resulting text, find your key ID in the statement that resembles <literal>pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C</literal>. Your key ID is the 8 character <guilabel>word</guilabel> after the slash (<literal>/</literal>). In the previous example, the GPG Key ID is <literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>. Write down your key ID."
+msgstr "在生成的文本中，找到您的 key ID，它类似于 <literal>pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C</literal>。您的 key ID 是斜杠(<literal>/</literal>)后面的8个字符组成的部分。在前面这个例子中，GPG 的 Key ID 是<literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>。记下你的key ID."
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
msgid "Export your public key to a public server so that others can find it with the following command, substituting your key ID:"
msgstr "把你的公钥导出到一个公共服务器上,这样别人就能够通过如下命令找到它了,要替换为你的key ID:"
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
+msgstr "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
+
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "This GPG key ID will be used for your Fedora account creation described in <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Accounts_and_Subscriptions-Applying_for_an_Account\" />."
@@ -214,6 +250,11 @@ msgstr "介绍你自己"
msgid "Create a personal page at <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/User:Username\" />. This is very useful for Fedora contributors to get to know and contact each other."
msgstr "在<ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/User:Username\" />创建您的个人页面。这对Fedora贡献者之间相互了解并联系非常有利。"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Post a short self introduction to the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list and to the list of your local team with instructions from <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/L10N_Self_introduction\" />. Please remember to include your FAS user name and your language. With this information, sponsor can identify you for <guilabel>cvsl10n</guilabel> group joining approval."
+msgstr "按照 <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/L10N_Self_introduction\" /> 的说明向<systemitem>trans</systemitem> 邮件列表以及您所属语言组的列表发送一个简短的自我介绍。请记得加上您的 FAS 用户名和语言。协调人员以这些信息做为您加入 <guilabel>cvsl10n</guilabel> 组的证明 ，并许可您的加入。"
+
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Joining the <systemitem>cvsl10n</systemitem> Group"
@@ -263,44 +304,3 @@ msgstr "恭喜"
#, no-c-format
msgid "Sit back and enjoy your achievement. You are now a fully recognized member of the Fedora community, capable of digitally signing documents and emails, submitting contributions, publishing content on the wiki, submitting bugs, following the discussions of our groups and joining other Fedora teams."
msgstr "休息一下，享受您的成就。您现在是个完全受承认的Fedora社区成员了，能够数字签署文档和电子邮件，提交内容，向wiki发布内容，提交bugs，参与小组讨论和加入到其它组。"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Post a short self introduction to the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list and to the list of your local team with instructions from <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/L10N_Self_introduction\" />. Please remember to include your FAS user name and your language. With this information, sponsor can identify you for <guilabel>cvsl10n</guilabel> group joining approval."
-msgstr "按照 <ulink url=\"https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/L10N_Self_introduction\" /> 的说明向<systemitem>trans</systemitem> 邮件列表以及您所属语言组的列表发送一个简短的自我介绍。请记得加上您的 FAS 用户名和语言。协调人员以这些信息做为您加入 <guilabel>cvsl10n</guilabel> 组的证明 ，并许可您的加入。"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "To become a Fedora Translator, you must sign up for accounts and subscriptions as described in this chapter. If you have questions, post them on the <systemitem>trans</systemitem> mailing list, or ask for help via Internet Relay Chat, or <acronym>IRC</acronym>, at <systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> on channel <systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem>."
-msgstr "要成为 Fedora 翻译贡献人员，您必须按照本章的描述来注册帐号和订阅。如果您有疑问，可将问题发送到 <systemitem>trans</systemitem> 邮件列表或者通过 Internet Relay Chat(<acronym>IRC</acronym>)，在<systemitem class=\"fqdomainname\">irc.freenode.org</systemitem> 站点的<systemitem>#fedora-l10n</systemitem> 频道寻求帮助。"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
-msgstr "<command>gpg --gen-key</command>"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
-msgstr "<command>ssh-keygen -t rsa</command>"
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid ""
-"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
-msgstr ""
-"<command>chmod 700 ~/.ssh</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 600 ~/.ssh/id_rsa</command>\n"
-"<command>chmod 644 ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub</command>"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "In the resulting text, find your key ID in the statement that resembles <literal>pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C</literal>. Your key ID is the 8 character <guilabel>word</guilabel> after the slash (<literal>/</literal>). In the previous example, the GPG Key ID is <literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>. Write down your key ID."
-msgstr "在生成的文本中，找到您的 key ID，它类似于 <literal>pub 1024D/1B2AFA1C</literal>。您的 key ID 是斜杠(<literal>/</literal>)后面的8个字符组成的部分。在前面这个例子中，GPG 的 Key ID 是<literal>1B2AFA1C</literal>。记下你的key ID."
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
-msgstr "<command>gpg --keyserver subkeys.pgp.net --send-keys <replaceable>GPGKEYID</replaceable></command>"
diff --git a/zh-CN/Author_Group.po b/zh-CN/Author_Group.po
index 5d94874..d8c3abb 100644
--- a/zh-CN/Author_Group.po
+++ b/zh-CN/Author_Group.po
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-04-19T12:09:43\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-14T00:21:08\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
@@ -16,20 +16,15 @@ msgstr ""
msgid "Manuel"
msgstr "Manuel"
-#. Tag: firstname
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Paul"
-msgstr "Paul"
-
#. Tag: surname
#, no-c-format
msgid "Ospina"
msgstr "Ospina"
-#. Tag: surname
+#. Tag: firstname
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Frields"
-msgstr "Frields"
+msgid "Paul"
+msgstr "Paul"
#. Tag: othername
#, no-c-format
@@ -38,8 +33,8 @@ msgstr "W."
#. Tag: surname
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Mizumoto"
-msgstr "Mizumoto"
+msgid "Frields"
+msgstr "Frields"
#. Tag: firstname
#, no-c-format
@@ -48,34 +43,39 @@ msgstr "Noriko"
#. Tag: surname
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Glezos"
-msgstr "Glezos"
+msgid "Mizumoto"
+msgstr "Mizumoto"
#. Tag: firstname
#, no-c-format
msgid "Dmitris"
msgstr "Dmitris"
-#. Tag: othername
+#. Tag: surname
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Búrigo"
-msgstr "Búrigo"
+msgid "Glezos"
+msgstr "Glezos"
#. Tag: firstname
#, no-c-format
msgid "Diego"
msgstr "Diego"
-#. Tag: firstname
+#. Tag: othername
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Piotr"
-msgstr "Piotr"
+msgid "Búrigo"
+msgstr "Búrigo"
#. Tag: surname
#, no-c-format
msgid "Zacarão"
msgstr "Zacarão"
+#. Tag: firstname
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Piotr"
+msgstr "Piotr"
+
#. Tag: surname
#, no-c-format
msgid "Drąg"
diff --git a/zh-CN/Translating_Documentation.po b/zh-CN/Translating_Documentation.po
index 5f99182..0b6fe38 100644
--- a/zh-CN/Translating_Documentation.po
+++ b/zh-CN/Translating_Documentation.po
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: zh_CN\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugs.kde.org\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-04-28T13:07:25\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2009-07-03 18:36+0800\n"
"Last-Translator: ZhangWei <sir.zhangwei(a)gmail.com>\n"
"Language-Team: Simplified Chinese <i18n-translation(a)lists.linux.net.cn>\n"
@@ -24,110 +24,110 @@ msgstr "文档翻译"
msgid "Current Fedora Documentation material is now maintained in the Fedora Hosted system as <command>git</command> repositories. This includes the latest versions of the common documentation build tools. You do not need to install <command>git</command> to translate these materials. Instead, use Transifex, as described in previous sections, to translate these documentation materials."
msgstr "当前的Fedora文档材料通过<command>git</command>repositories进行维护，它包含了最新版本的通用文档建立工具。你不必安装<command>git</command>来翻译这些材料，而是用前面提到的Transifex来翻译这些文档。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Like software, go to your language page and select a target release."
-msgstr "与软件翻译类似，到您的语言页面然后选择要翻译的发行版。"
+msgid "Understanding the Multiple Files Structure"
+msgstr "了解多文件结构"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "You may leave the details blank, or name the guide name(s) which you like to translate."
-msgstr "details可以空着不填，或者填上您所翻译的文档的名称。"
+msgid "Unlike software, a guide has multiple <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> files structure. Each file corresponds to each chapter in that guide. The file name usually consists of the chapter name. This structure is very useful as more than one translator can work on certain guide same time."
+msgstr "与软件翻译不同，向导文档由多个 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件组成。每个文件代表文档中的一个章节。文件名通常包含对应的章节名称。这样的结构在多个翻译人员同时翻译一份文档时很有用处。"
-#. Tag: title
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Attach Files if Necessary"
-msgstr "Attach Files if Necessary"
+msgid "Like software, go to your language page and select a target release."
+msgstr "与软件翻译类似，到您的语言页面然后选择要翻译的发行版。"
-#. Tag: title
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "What to Translate"
-msgstr "翻译哪些"
+msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Japanese language is used as an example. The page lists all projects of particular release software packages and documentation along with stats and options."
+msgstr "以 Fedora Transifex 日语翻译页面为例。页面列出了特定版本的所有软件项目和文档，以及翻译统计和翻译选项。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The most important documentation for each release of Fedora are the following:"
-msgstr "这些是每个版本的最重要的文档模块/目录:"
+msgid "Any entry begins with <guilabel>Docs</guilabel> indicates documentation. To access multiple files structure, click the file icon in <guibutton>Option</guibutton>."
+msgstr "以 <guilabel>Docs</guilabel> 开头的为文档。要查看多文件结构，点击 <guibutton>Option</guibutton> 中的文件图标。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: docbook-locales</guilabel>"
-msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: docbook-locales</guilabel>"
+msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Japanese language is used as an example. The page lists multiple files for Japanse release-notes along with stats and options."
+msgstr "以 Fedora Transifex 日语翻译页面为例。页面列出了日语发行注记的多个文件以及统计结果和选项。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Release Notes</guilabel>"
-msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Release Notes</guilabel>"
+msgid "Use the down-arrow icon to download the target <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file and use the up-arrow icon to submit. Alternatively using the pencil icon allows you to edit the file online. Please notice that the up-arrow icon for submission and the pencil icon for online edit appears only if the user is logged in."
+msgstr "用向下箭头的图标下载 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件，点向上箭头图标提交文件。另外点击铅笔图标可让您在线进行翻译。请注意提交的向上箭头图标和在线编辑的铅笔图标仅在用户登录后才会显示。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: About Fedora</guilabel>"
-msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: About Fedora</guilabel>"
+msgid "Creating docbook-locales File"
+msgstr "创建 docbook语言文件"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme</guilabel>"
-msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme</guilabel>"
+msgid "If you are creating the first-ever translation for a locale, you must first translate docbook-locales file used in all documents for your locale. The docbook-locales files are located in the Fedora Hosted repository. Visit Transifex at <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/p/docbook-locales/c/master/\" />, and add your new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file by following the instruction described above."
+msgstr "如果您首次创建了一个语言的翻译，您需要先翻译您所在语言的 docbook语言文件，所有文档都会使用该文件。该文件位于 Fedora Hosted 仓库。 打开 Transifex <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/p/docbook-locales/c/master/\" />，按照以上的介绍添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Burning ISOs</guilabel>"
-msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Burning ISOs</guilabel>"
+msgid "Next, the request of locale addition needs to be made. File a bug in Bugzilla against Product <guilabel>Fedora Documentation</guilabel> with Component <guilabel>docs-requests</guilabel> and Summary <guilabel>[<replaceable>ja</replaceable>]: New language support request</guilabel>."
+msgstr "接下来需要完成语言的添加。在 Bugzilla 中，以 <guilabel>docs-requests</guilabel> 为 Compoent，<guilabel>[<replaceable>ja</replaceable>]: New language support request</guilabel> 为摘要向 <guilabel>Fedora Documentation</guilabel> 提交 bug。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Live Image</guilabel>"
-msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Live Image</guilabel>"
+msgid "You may leave the details blank, or name the guide name(s) which you like to translate."
+msgstr "details可以空着不填，或者填上您所翻译的文档的名称。"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Understanding the Multiple Files Structure"
-msgstr "了解多文件结构"
+msgid "Attach Files if Necessary"
+msgstr "Attach Files if Necessary"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Unlike software, a guide has multiple <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> files structure. Each file corresponds to each chapter in that guide. The file name usually consists of the chapter name. This structure is very useful as more than one translator can work on certain guide same time."
-msgstr "与软件翻译不同，向导文档由多个 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件组成。每个文件代表文档中的一个章节。文件名通常包含对应的章节名称。这样的结构在多个翻译人员同时翻译一份文档时很有用处。"
+msgid "If you have any problems submitting <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> files using above instructions, you can attach it to the bug."
+msgstr "如果您按上述步骤提交 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件时出现问题，您可以提交 bug。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Any entry begins with <guilabel>Docs</guilabel> indicates documentation. To access multiple files structure, click the file icon in <guibutton>Option</guibutton>."
-msgstr "以 <guilabel>Docs</guilabel> 开头的为文档。要查看多文件结构，点击 <guibutton>Option</guibutton> 中的文件图标。"
+msgid "What to Translate"
+msgstr "翻译哪些"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Japanese language is used as an example. The page lists all projects of particular release software packages and documentation along with stats and options."
-msgstr "以 Fedora Transifex 日语翻译页面为例。页面列出了特定版本的所有软件项目和文档，以及翻译统计和翻译选项。"
+msgid "The most important documentation for each release of Fedora are the following:"
+msgstr "这些是每个版本的最重要的文档模块/目录:"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Use the down-arrow icon to download the target <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file and use the up-arrow icon to submit. Alternatively using the pencil icon allows you to edit the file online. Please notice that the up-arrow icon for submission and the pencil icon for online edit appears only if the user is logged in."
-msgstr "用向下箭头的图标下载 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件，点向上箭头图标提交文件。另外点击铅笔图标可让您在线进行翻译。请注意提交的向上箭头图标和在线编辑的铅笔图标仅在用户登录后才会显示。"
+msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: docbook-locales</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: docbook-locales</guilabel>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Japanese language is used as an example. The page lists multiple files for Japanse release-notes along with stats and options."
-msgstr "以 Fedora Transifex 日语翻译页面为例。页面列出了日语发行注记的多个文件以及统计结果和选项。"
+msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Release Notes</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Release Notes</guilabel>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "If you are creating the first-ever translation for a locale, you must first translate docbook-locales file used in all documents for your locale. The docbook-locales files are located in the Fedora Hosted repository. Visit Transifex at <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/p/docbook-locales/c/master/\" />, and add your new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file by following the instruction described above."
-msgstr "如果您首次创建了一个语言的翻译，您需要先翻译您所在语言的 docbook语言文件，所有文档都会使用该文件。该文件位于 Fedora Hosted 仓库。 打开 Transifex <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/p/docbook-locales/c/master/\" />，按照以上的介绍添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件。"
+msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: About Fedora</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: About Fedora</guilabel>"
-#. Tag: title
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Creating docbook-locales File"
-msgstr "创建 docbook语言文件"
+msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme</guilabel>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Next, the request of locale addition needs to be made. File a bug in Bugzilla against Product <guilabel>Fedora Documentation</guilabel> with Component <guilabel>docs-requests</guilabel> and Summary <guilabel>[<replaceable>ja</replaceable>]: New language support request</guilabel>."
-msgstr "接下来需要完成语言的添加。在 Bugzilla 中，以 <guilabel>docs-requests</guilabel> 为 Compoent，<guilabel>[<replaceable>ja</replaceable>]: New language support request</guilabel> 为摘要向 <guilabel>Fedora Documentation</guilabel> 提交 bug。"
+msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Burning ISOs</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Burning ISOs</guilabel>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "If you have any problems submitting <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> files using above instructions, you can attach it to the bug."
-msgstr "如果您按上述步骤提交 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件时出现问题，您可以提交 bug。"
+msgid "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Live Image</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Docs :: Readme Live Image</guilabel>"
#~ msgid "Example Locale is <replaceable>pt_BR</replaceable>"
#~ msgstr "例子的语言区域是<replaceable>pt_BR</replaceable>"
diff --git a/zh-CN/Translating_Software.po b/zh-CN/Translating_Software.po
index d02f8a7..afff850 100644
--- a/zh-CN/Translating_Software.po
+++ b/zh-CN/Translating_Software.po
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: zh_CN\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugs.kde.org\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:45:01\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2009-07-03 18:36+0800\n"
"Last-Translator: ZhangWei <sir.zhangwei(a)gmail.com>\n"
"Language-Team: Simplified Chinese <i18n-translation(a)lists.linux.net.cn>\n"
@@ -31,123 +31,123 @@ msgstr "这一章介绍如何翻译驻留在<systemitem class=\"domainname\">fed
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Obtaining and Translating Projects"
-msgstr "获取并翻译项目"
+msgid "Prepare the Directory for Download"
+msgstr "为下载准备一个目录"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "If any error message appears, correct it before commit."
-msgstr "如果出现任何错误,在提交前改正它们."
-
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Committing Projects"
-msgstr "提交项目翻译"
+msgid "To find which projects are translatable, visit the project list at <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/\" />."
+msgstr "要查看哪些项目可以翻译,请访问位于 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects\" /> 的项目列表。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Once you finish translation work, commit the file using the same interface."
-msgstr "完成翻译后，使用同一界面提交文件。"
+msgid "Before you download any files, prepare the directory to hold files. The described structure below is an example only, and your structure can be formed differently."
+msgstr "在您下载任何文件之前，先准备好存放这些文件的目录。下面介绍的结构是一个例子，您的结构可以与之不同。"
-#. Tag: title
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Login"
-msgstr "登录"
+msgid "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
+msgstr "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Submit"
-msgstr "提交"
+msgid "Obtaining and Translating Projects"
+msgstr "获取并翻译项目"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "To proofread your translation as part of the software, follow these steps:"
-msgstr "作为软件的一部分,需要校正你的翻译，按照这些步骤做："
+msgid "Now that you have prepared a directory structure, you can download a file to translate. You may need to communicate with other translators in your language team to avoid conflict. If you are not sure, please contact your language coordinator. Also locking a file will avoid conflict."
+msgstr "既然您已准备好了目录结构，那么您可以下载一个文件来翻译了。你可能需要和您语言小组中的其它翻译人员进行沟通，以避免翻译中出现的冲突。如果您不是很确定，请联系您所属语言的协调员。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Change directory to the package you want to proofread. For example,"
-msgstr "转到你想校正的包所在的文件夹。例如，"
+msgid "Visit your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
+msgstr "访问您的语言页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja\" />，然后选择一个目标版本。界面将把您重定向到该版本页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "First, back up the existing file:"
-msgstr "首先，备份现存的文件："
+msgid "Scroll down the page to find the table of all projects available for that release. Use the down-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Download po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project to download the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file as the name of your choice to the directory you created in the previous section (e.g. <filename class=\"extension\">abrt.po</filename>)."
+msgstr "向下滚动页面，找到这个版本的项目列表。用每个项目旁边标记为 <guibutton>Download ja.po</guibutton> 的向下箭头下载图标或类似图标下载 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件到上一节所创建的目录中，并将它重命名为您想要的名称（如 <filename class=\"extension\">abrt.po</filename>）。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Now move the file converted for proofreading."
-msgstr "现在移动准备校对的文件"
+msgid "Now the file is ready for translation. Translate the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file into your language with a <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> editor of your choice such as <application>Lokalize</application> or <application>gtranslator</application>."
+msgstr "现在文件已经准备好来翻译了。使用 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件编辑器，如 <application>Lokalize</application> 或者<application>gtranslator</application> 将 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 翻译成您的语言。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Exit root user."
-msgstr "退出root用户。"
+msgid "Check the integrity of your file before commit."
+msgstr "在提交前，请先检查文件的完整性。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Proofread the package with the translated strings as part of the application:"
-msgstr "用应用程序中翻译过的字串来校正包的翻译："
+msgid "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgstr "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The application related to the translated package runs with the translated strings."
-msgstr "与翻译的包相关的应用程序会带着翻译的字符一起运行"
+msgid "If any error message appears, correct it before commit."
+msgstr "如果出现任何错误,在提交前改正它们."
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Committing Projects"
+msgstr "提交项目翻译"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "To find which projects are translatable, visit the project list at <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects/\" />."
-msgstr "要查看哪些项目可以翻译,请访问位于 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/projects\" /> 的项目列表。"
+msgid "Once you finish translation work, commit the file using the same interface."
+msgstr "完成翻译后，使用同一界面提交文件。"
-#. Tag: title
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Prepare the Directory for Download"
-msgstr "为下载准备一个目录"
+msgid "Go back to your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
+msgstr "回到您的语言主页，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja\" />，然后选择一个版本。页面将重定向到该版本页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />。"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
-msgstr "<command>mkdir -p ~/myproject/</command>"
+msgid "Login"
+msgstr "登录"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Before you download any files, prepare the directory to hold files. The described structure below is an example only, and your structure can be formed differently."
-msgstr "在您下载任何文件之前，先准备好存放这些文件的目录。下面介绍的结构是一个例子，您的结构可以与之不同。"
+msgid "At the top of the page, select <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> to visit the <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> page, if not logged in yet. Authenticate with your Fedora Account System user name and password."
+msgstr "在页面顶端选择 <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> 来进入到 <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> 页面。然后用您的 Fedora 帐户系统用户名及密码登录。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Now that you have prepared a directory structure, you can download a file to translate. You may need to communicate with other translators in your language team to avoid conflict. If you are not sure, please contact your language coordinator. Also locking a file will avoid conflict."
-msgstr "既然您已准备好了目录结构，那么您可以下载一个文件来翻译了。你可能需要和您语言小组中的其它翻译人员进行沟通，以避免翻译中出现的冲突。如果您不是很确定，请联系您所属语言的协调员。"
+msgid "Submit"
+msgstr "提交"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Visit your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
-msgstr "访问您的语言页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja\" />，然后选择一个目标版本。界面将把您重定向到该版本页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />。"
+msgid "Use the up-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Send a translation for po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project, and click the browse button to locate your translated file."
+msgstr "点项目旁边标为<guibutton>Send a translation for this language</guibutton> 的向上箭头图标，然后点浏览按钮来选择您翻译好的文件。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Check the integrity of your file before commit."
-msgstr "在提交前，请先检查文件的完整性。"
+msgid "Click the <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to commit your translated file."
+msgstr "点 <guibutton>发送</guibutton> 来提交您的翻译。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Now the file is ready for translation. Translate the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file into your language with a <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> editor of your choice such as <application>Lokalize</application> or <application>gtranslator</application>."
-msgstr "现在文件已经准备好来翻译了。使用 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件编辑器，如 <application>Lokalize</application> 或者<application>gtranslator</application> 将 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 翻译成您的语言。"
+msgid "Interface displays the message <guilabel>File submitted successfully</guilabel>. If you receive an error or some other message, please post it to the Fedora Localization Project mailing list so it can be addressed."
+msgstr "页面将显示 <guilabel>File submitted successfully</guilabel>。如果您收到错误或其它提交成功信息，请把它贴到 Fedora 本地化项目邮件列表中以便解决。"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
-msgstr "<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgid "Adding New <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> File"
+msgstr "添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Go back to your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
+msgid "Go to your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
msgstr "回到您的语言主页，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja\" />，然后选择一个版本。页面将重定向到该版本页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Vietnamese language is used as an example. The screenshot displays the part of <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel>."
-msgstr "以越南语的 Fedora Transifex 页面为例。屏幕截图显示了 <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> 的一部分。"
+msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Vietnamese language is used as an example. The page lists all projects of particular release software packages and documentation along with stats and options."
+msgstr "以越南语的 Fedora Transifex 页面为例。页面列出了特定版本下所有软件和文档项目的列表，以及统计结果和选项。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
@@ -156,33 +156,34 @@ msgstr "滚到到底部，如果有未被翻译的项目并且没有为该语言
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "At the top of the page, select <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> to visit the <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> page, if not logged in yet. Authenticate with your Fedora Account System user name and password."
-msgstr "在页面顶端选择 <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> 来进入到 <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> 页面。然后用您的 Fedora 帐户系统用户名及密码登录。"
+msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Vietnamese language is used as an example. The screenshot displays the part of <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel>."
+msgstr "以越南语的 Fedora Transifex 页面为例。屏幕截图显示了 <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> 的一部分。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Click the <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to commit your translated file."
-msgstr "点 <guibutton>发送</guibutton> 来提交您的翻译。"
+msgid "To add new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>, click the component to add in <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> section. It brings up the page of that project's component."
+msgstr "要添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>，在 <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> 部分点击要添加的组件。这将会转到该项目组件的页面。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Use the up-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Send a translation for po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project, and click the browse button to locate your translated file."
-msgstr "点项目旁边标为<guibutton>Send a translation for this language</guibutton> 的向上箭头图标，然后点浏览按钮来选择您翻译好的文件。"
-
-#. Tag: title
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "Adding New <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> File"
-msgstr "添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件"
+msgid "ABRT project master page, showing <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> section where <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file is available."
+msgstr "在 ABRT 项目的 master 页面，显示了 <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> 部分，<filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> 文件位于该部分。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Interface displays the message <guilabel>File submitted successfully</guilabel>. If you receive an error or some other message, please post it to the Fedora Localization Project mailing list so it can be addressed."
-msgstr "页面将显示 <guilabel>File submitted successfully</guilabel>。如果您收到错误或其它提交成功信息，请把它贴到 Fedora 本地化项目邮件列表中以便解决。"
+msgid "Under <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> section, there is the source file. Using down-arrow icon to download the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file. Change the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file to <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file for your language translation."
+msgstr "在 <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> 下面，有源文件。点击向下箭头图标下载 <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> 文件。将 <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> 文件根据您的翻译语言修改为 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "The Fedora's Transifex screen for Vietnamese language is used as an example. The page lists all projects of particular release software packages and documentation along with stats and options."
-msgstr "以越南语的 Fedora Transifex 页面为例。页面列出了特定版本下所有软件和文档项目的列表，以及统计结果和选项。"
+msgid ""
+"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
+msgstr ""
+"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
+"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
@@ -194,46 +195,40 @@ msgstr "完成翻译之后，在项目页面点击 <guilabel>Add a new translati
msgid "ABRT project master page, showing <guilabel>Add a translation file</guilabel> pane."
msgstr "ABRT 项目的 master 页面，显示了 <guilabel>Add a translation file</guilabel> 窗格。"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button of <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> to locate your translated <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file. In the field of <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel>, type your new file name comforming with the structure instructed (e.g. po/vi.po). Enter the approriate message, and then click <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to submit."
+msgstr "点击 <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> 的 <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> 按钮来选择您翻译好的 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件。在 <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel> 处输入新文件名，文件名组成要符合要求（如 po/vi.po）。输入适当的信息，然后点击 <guibutton>Send</guibutton> 按钮提交。"
+
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Proofreading Translations"
msgstr "校对翻译"
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid ""
-"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
-msgstr ""
-"<command>mv ~/myproject/abrt.pot abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>lokalize abrt.po</command>\n"
-"<command>msgfmt -cvo /dev/null abrt.po</command>"
-
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
msgid "Since Fedora 12, the composed live image has been available to download for reviewing and correcting software translation in user interface. This live image is composed around a week before Fedora Software Translation Deadline and made available by deadline date. This image should include all latest translation submitted at this point."
msgstr "从 Fedora 12 开始，制作好的 live 镜像可下载用来在用户界面下检查和改正软件翻译。该 live 镜像在 Fedora 软件翻译截止日之前一周制作并在截止日当天放出。该镜像应包括所有最新的翻译。"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
-msgstr "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
+msgid "To proofread your translation as part of the software, follow these steps:"
+msgstr "作为软件的一部分,需要校正你的翻译，按照这些步骤做："
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "As a root user, overwrite the existing <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file in <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename>."
-msgstr "以 root 用户操作，覆盖 <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename> 下的已有 <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> 文件。"
+msgid "Change directory to the package you want to proofread. For example,"
+msgstr "转到你想校正的包所在的文件夹。例如，"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "To add new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>, click the component to add in <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> section. It brings up the page of that project's component."
-msgstr "要添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>，在 <guilabel>Untranslated Components</guilabel> 部分点击要添加的组件。这将会转到该项目组件的页面。"
+msgid "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
+msgstr "<command>cd ~/myproject/<replaceable>system-config-printer/</replaceable></command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Go to your language page such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/\" />, and select a target release. The interface will redirect you to a page for that release, such as <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />."
-msgstr "回到您的语言主页，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja\" />，然后选择一个版本。页面将重定向到该版本页面，如 <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/languages/l/ja/collection/c/fedora/r/fe…" />。"
+msgid "Convert the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file to a <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file using <command>msgfmt</command> with <option>-o</option> option:"
+msgstr "用带 <option>-o</option> 选项的 <command>msgfmt</command> 命令将 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件转为<filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> 文件："
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
@@ -242,18 +237,13 @@ msgstr "<command>msgfmt -o system-config-printer.mo <replaceable>ja</replaceable
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Convert the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file to a <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file using <command>msgfmt</command> with <option>-o</option> option:"
-msgstr "用带 <option>-o</option> 选项的 <command>msgfmt</command> 命令将 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件转为<filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> 文件："
-
-#. Tag: screen
-#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>exit</command>"
-msgstr "<command>exit</command>"
+msgid "As a root user, overwrite the existing <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> file in <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename>."
+msgstr "以 root 用户操作，覆盖 <filename>/usr/share/locale/<replaceable>lang</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</filename> 下的已有 <filename class=\"extension\">mo</filename> 文件。"
-#. Tag: screen
+#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ja_JP.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
-msgstr "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ja_JP.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
+msgid "First, back up the existing file:"
+msgstr "首先，备份现存的文件："
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
@@ -265,6 +255,11 @@ msgstr "<command>su -</command>"
msgid "<command>cp /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/<replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo-backup</command>"
msgstr "<command>cp /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/<replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo-backup</command>"
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Now move the file converted for proofreading."
+msgstr "现在移动准备校对的文件"
+
#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
msgid "<command>mv <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo /usr/share/locale/<replaceable>ja</replaceable>/LC_MESSAGES/</command>"
@@ -272,23 +267,28 @@ msgstr "<command>mv <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable>.mo /usr/sha
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Scroll down the page to find the table of all projects available for that release. Use the down-arrow icon labeled <guibutton>Download po/ja.po</guibutton> in the option area of each project to download the <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file as the name of your choice to the directory you created in the previous section (e.g. <filename class=\"extension\">abrt.po</filename>)."
-msgstr "向下滚动页面，找到这个版本的项目列表。用每个项目旁边标记为 <guibutton>Download ja.po</guibutton> 的向下箭头下载图标或类似图标下载 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件到上一节所创建的目录中，并将它重命名为您想要的名称（如 <filename class=\"extension\">abrt.po</filename>）。"
+msgid "Exit root user."
+msgstr "退出root用户。"
-#. Tag: para
+#. Tag: screen
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Under <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> section, there is the source file. Using down-arrow icon to download the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file. Change the <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file to <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file for your language translation."
-msgstr "在 <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> 下面，有源文件。点击向下箭头图标下载 <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> 文件。将 <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> 文件根据您的翻译语言修改为 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename>。"
+msgid "<command>exit</command>"
+msgstr "<command>exit</command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Click <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button of <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> to locate your translated <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> file. In the field of <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel>, type your new file name comforming with the structure instructed (e.g. po/vi.po). Enter the approriate message, and then click <guibutton>Send</guibutton> button to submit."
-msgstr "点击 <guilabel>Local file: *</guilabel> 的 <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> 按钮来选择您翻译好的 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件。在 <guilabel>or enter it here:</guilabel> 处输入新文件名，文件名组成要符合要求（如 po/vi.po）。输入适当的信息，然后点击 <guibutton>Send</guibutton> 按钮提交。"
+msgid "Proofread the package with the translated strings as part of the application:"
+msgstr "用应用程序中翻译过的字串来校正包的翻译："
+
+#. Tag: screen
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ja_JP.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
+msgstr "<command>LANG=<replaceable>ja_JP.UTF-8</replaceable> <replaceable>system-config-printer</replaceable></command>"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "ABRT project master page, showing <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> section where <filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> file is available."
-msgstr "在 ABRT 项目的 master 页面，显示了 <guilabel>Translation Files</guilabel> 部分，<filename class=\"extension\">pot</filename> 文件位于该部分。"
+msgid "The application related to the translated package runs with the translated strings."
+msgstr "与翻译的包相关的应用程序会带着翻译的字符一起运行"
#~ msgid "Adding New .po File"
#~ msgstr "添加新的.po文件"
diff --git a/zh-CN/Translating_Websites.po b/zh-CN/Translating_Websites.po
index caf6fe2..3189807 100644
--- a/zh-CN/Translating_Websites.po
+++ b/zh-CN/Translating_Websites.po
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-05-15T19:01:56\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-05-15T19:01:56\n"
"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
"Language-Team: None\n"
@@ -18,18 +18,13 @@ msgstr "翻译网页"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Download, translate, and commit website projects the same way as for software projects — refer to <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Software\" />."
-msgstr "跟翻译软件项目一样，下载、翻译然后提交--参考 <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Software\" />。"
-
-#. Tag: para
-#, no-c-format
msgid "Fedora Websites are also translatable via Transifex. You can find all projects related to Fedora websites in the <literal>Fedora Websites</literal> collection, <ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/collections/c/fedora/r/websites/\" />."
msgstr "通过 Transifex 还可以翻译 Fedora 网页内容。您可以在 <literal>Fedora Websites</literal> 中找到所有跟 Fedora 网页有关的项目，<ulink url=\"https://translate.fedoraproject.org/collections/c/fedora/r/websites/\" />。"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Add new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> files the same as for software projects. If you are creating the first-ever translation for a locale, you must notify the Fedora Websites team to add the new language to the website. Post the request to the <literal>trans</literal> mailing list, so that the Websites team can add the language to the <systemitem>Apache</systemitem> configuration for the site."
-msgstr "添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件同软件项目的方法一样。如果您创建了之前没有翻译的语言，您必须通知 Fedora 网站小组将新语言添加到网站。向 <literal>trans</literal> 邮件列表发出请求，这样网站小组人员可以将语言加到网站的 <systemitem>Apache</systemitem> 配置文件中。"
+msgid "Download, translate, and commit website projects the same way as for software projects — refer to <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Software\" />."
+msgstr "跟翻译软件项目一样，下载、翻译然后提交--参考 <xref linkend=\"sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Software\" />。"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
@@ -38,10 +33,15 @@ msgstr "添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件"
#. Tag: para
#, no-c-format
-msgid "Generally the Websites team provides test sites that you can use to proofread your work."
-msgstr "通常网站小组都会提供测试网页以便您可以校队您的翻译。"
+msgid "Add new <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> files the same as for software projects. If you are creating the first-ever translation for a locale, you must notify the Fedora Websites team to add the new language to the website. Post the request to the <literal>trans</literal> mailing list, so that the Websites team can add the language to the <systemitem>Apache</systemitem> configuration for the site."
+msgstr "添加新 <filename class=\"extension\">po</filename> 文件同软件项目的方法一样。如果您创建了之前没有翻译的语言，您必须通知 Fedora 网站小组将新语言添加到网站。向 <literal>trans</literal> 邮件列表发出请求，这样网站小组人员可以将语言加到网站的 <systemitem>Apache</systemitem> 配置文件中。"
#. Tag: title
#, no-c-format
msgid "Proofreading"
msgstr "校对"
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Generally the Websites team provides test sites that you can use to proofread your work."
+msgstr "通常网站小组都会提供测试网页以便您可以校队您的翻译。"
diff --git a/zh-CN/Translating_Wiki.po b/zh-CN/Translating_Wiki.po
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7cb7fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/zh-CN/Translating_Wiki.po
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+#
+# AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
+#
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: 0\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-29T04:20:10\n"
+"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n"
+"Language-Team: None\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: application/x-publican; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Translating Wiki Pages"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The <ulink url=\"http://fedoraproject.org/wiki\">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Find the English version of the page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Handling translations without an English version"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add the language template to the English page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template: <command>{{autolang|base=yes}}</command> The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Create the language template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Add your language to the template"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this: <command>{{lang|en|page=''Base page name''}}</command>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "The text between <code>lang</code> and <code>page=</code> is the list of language codes. Add the language code that you are translating to this list. Use [http://svn.wikimedia.org/viewvc/mediawiki/trunk/phase3/languages/Names.php?… this list] to determine the proper MediaWiki language code."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Please keep the list alphabetical"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Start the new page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include \"base=yes\" in the template for non-English subpages.''"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: title
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "Moving pages from the old translation setup"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Tag: para
+#, no-c-format
+msgid "For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., \"Fedora Project Wiki/de\"). Click the \"move\" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the \"to new title\" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top."
+msgstr ""
+
1
0
[translation-quick-start-guide] the word stepX removed and added new chapter of Translating Wiki
by Noriko Mizumoto 28 Jun '10
by Noriko Mizumoto 28 Jun '10
28 Jun '10
commit 6fb53e1bf0a27ece867d51baa1a7faced66d10bc
Author: Noriko Mizumoto <noriko(a)noriko.csb>
Date: Tue Jun 29 14:09:20 2010 +1000
the word stepX removed and added new chapter of Translating Wiki
en-US/Translating_Wiki.xml | 27 ++++++++++++++-------------
en-US/Translation_Quick_Start_Guide.xml | 3 +++
2 files changed, 17 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/en-US/Translating_Wiki.xml b/en-US/Translating_Wiki.xml
index 93f45c7..2a0faa6 100644
--- a/en-US/Translating_Wiki.xml
+++ b/en-US/Translating_Wiki.xml
@@ -7,23 +7,23 @@
<para>
The <ulink url="http://fedoraproject.org/wiki">Fedora Wiki</ulink> is the repository for project-related information. Some of these pages may need to be translated in order to better serve the Fedora community. This chapter will explain, step-by-step, the proper method of translating a wiki page.
</para>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_1">
- <title>Step 1: Find the English version of the page</title>
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Find_the_English_version_of_the_page">
+ <title>Find the English version of the page</title>
<para>
English is the base language for the Fedora Project wiki, so there needs to be an English version of the page you are working on. (If there isn't an English version of the page you are working on, see Handling translations without an English version below.)
</para>
<para>
If there is already a language template at the top of that page, click <command>[edit]</command> on the right side of the language box and move to step 4; otherwise, continue to step 2.
</para>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_1-Handling_translations_without_an_English_version">
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Find_the_English_version_of_the_page-Handling_translations_without_an_English_version">
<title>Handling translations without an English version</title>
<para>
If the page you create doesn't have an English version, create a new page for the English version, add the {{template|autolang}} template as noted above, and then add the {{template|needs english}} template. This will flag the page for needing an English translation as well as create a base page.
</para>
</section>
</section>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_2">
- <title>Step 2: Add the language template to the English page</title>
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Add_the_language_template_to_the_English_page">
+ <title>Add the language template to the English page</title>
<para>
Edit the English page, and at the top of it, add the {{template|autolang}} template:
@@ -32,14 +32,14 @@
The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the page.
</para>
</section>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_3">
- <title>Step 3: Create the language template</title>
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Create_the_language_template">
+ <title>Create the language template</title>
<para>
The {{template|autolang}} autolang template should provide a link for you to set up the language box. Click it, and an edit page will come up. ''Don't change any of the content'' and save the page. Then click the <command>[edit]</command> link on the right side of the language box.
</para>
</section>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_4">
- <title>Step 4: Add your language to the template</title>
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Add_your_language_to_the_template">
+ <title>Add your language to the template</title>
<para>
At this point you should have an edit box open with template syntax that looks similar to this:
@@ -52,16 +52,17 @@ The <code>base=yes</code> part is ''required'' for the English page. Save the pa
<para>Keep the list of language codes alphabetical by code. This means German (de) should come before English (en), for example.</para>
</note>
</section>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_5">
- <title>Step 5: Start the new page</title>
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Start_the_new_page">
+ <title>Start the new page</title>
<para>
Click on the red link for your language to start the new page. Insert the template <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> at the top of your page, so that the list of languages is there. ''Be certain to not include "base=yes" in the template for non-English subpages.''
</para>
- <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Step_5-Moving_pages">
+ </section>
+ <section id="sect-Translation_Quick_Start_Guide-Translating_Wiki-Start_the_new_page-Moving_pages">
<title>Moving pages from the old translation setup</title>
<para>
For translated pages that aren't in the proper place, follow steps 1-4 above. Then, copy the title of the new page (e.g., "Fedora Project Wiki/de"). Click the "move" button at the top of the old page and paste the new page name in the "to new title" field. Edit the new page and add <code><command>{{autolang}}</command></code> to the top.
</para>
</section>
- </section>
+
</chapter>
diff --git a/en-US/Translation_Quick_Start_Guide.xml b/en-US/Translation_Quick_Start_Guide.xml
index e0f017c..cb6c171 100644
--- a/en-US/Translation_Quick_Start_Guide.xml
+++ b/en-US/Translation_Quick_Start_Guide.xml
@@ -15,6 +15,9 @@
<!-- Translating Websites --><xi:include href="Translating_Websites.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"></xi:include>
+ <!-- Translating Wiki --><xi:include href="Translating_Wiki.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"></xi:include>
+
+
<!-- <index /> -->
</book>
1
0